advertisement
PCL
®
-II/LinePrinter Plus
®
Technical Reference Manual
/LQH-HW
™
Printers
LineJet™ Printers
PCL
®
-II/LinePrinter Plus
®
Technical Reference Manual
Hewlett-Packard makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution, performance or use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic, electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of
Hewlett-Packard.
COPYRIGHT
2000, HEWLETT-PACKARD CO.
All rights reserved.
Trademark Acknowledgements
IBM and Proprinter are registered trademarks, and PC-DOS is a trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation.
E NERGY S TAR is a registered trademark of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency. As an E NERGY S TAR
Packard has determined that this product meets the E
®
Partner, Hewlett-
NERGY S TAR
® guidelines for energy efficiency.
Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Hewlett-Packard, HP and PCL are registered trademarks, and LineJet is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
IGP, PGL, LinePrinter Plus, and Printronix are registered trademarks of
Printronix, Inc.
Magnum and QMS are registered trademarks, and Code V is a trademark of
Quality Micro Systems, Inc.
Microsoft, MS, Windows and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
PKZIP is a registered trademark of PKWARE, Inc.
Postnet is a registered trademark of the United States Postal Service.
This product uses Intellifont Scalable typefaces and Intellifont technology.
Intellifont is a registered trademark of Agfa Division, Miles Incorporated
(Agfa).
CG, Garth Graphic, Intellifont, and Type Director are registered trademarks, and Shannon and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Division, Miles
Incorporated (Agfa). CG Bodoni, CG Century Schoolbook, CG Goudy Old
Style, CG Melliza, Microstyle, CG Omega, and CG Palacio are products of
Agfa Corporation. CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa.
Univers is a registered trademark of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries.
Letraset is a registered trademark, and Aachen, Revue and University Roman are trademarks of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation.
Futura is a registered trademark of Fundición Tipográfica Neufville, S.A.
ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Benguiat, ITC Bookman, ITC Century, ITC
Cheltenham, ITC Clearface, ITC Galliard, ITC Korinna, ITC Lubalin Graph,
ITC Souvenir, ITC Tiepolo, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.
Albertus, Gill Sans, and Times New Roman are registered trademarks, and
Monotype Baskerville is a trademark of The Monotype Corporation Plc, registered in the U.S. Pat. and TM office and elsewhere.
Hiroshige and Marigold are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography, Inc.
Table of Contents
1 Introduction........................................................... 17
About This Guide .................................................................................... 17
Warnings and Special Information ................................................... 17
Related Product Information ............................................................ 18
Software Features ..................................................................................19
PCL-II ...............................................................................................19
P-Series ........................................................................................... 19
Proprinter III XL ................................................................................ 20
Epson FX-1050 ................................................................................ 20
Installing Emulations ........................................................................ 20
2 HP PCL-II ............................................................. 27
Introduction ............................................................................................. 27
HP PCL-II Emulation Default Settings.............................................. 28
Switching Between the Emulations ..................................................28
Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes............................ 29
Printer Feature Set Compatibility ..................................................... 29
General Information ......................................................................... 30
Escape Sequences .......................................................................... 31
Bar Codes ........................................................................................ 34
US Postnet Barcodes ....................................................................... 43
Character Density Selection............................................................. 47
Character Font Selection ................................................................. 50
Character Overstrike ........................................................................ 53
Character Style Selection................................................................. 53
Cursor Control ..................................................................................54
Display Functions Mode ................................................................... 55
Horizontal Margin Selection ............................................................. 55
Line Spacing .................................................................................... 56
Logical Page Length Selection......................................................... 56
Perforation Skip Mode...................................................................... 57
Print Mode Selection ........................................................................ 58
Print Pitch Selection ......................................................................... 58
Printing in the Hex 80 through Hex FF Region................................. 58
PTX Linefeed ................................................................................... 59
Programmable Reset ....................................................................... 60
Table of Contents
Programmable VFC ......................................................................... 60
Raster Graphics ............................................................................... 69
Self-test ............................................................................................ 71
Standard (Computed) VFC .............................................................. 71
Stroke Weight (Bold) ........................................................................ 71
Switching Character Fonts ............................................................... 71
Text Length (Vertical Margin) Selection ........................................... 72
Transparent Print Data ..................................................................... 72
Underline Mode ................................................................................ 72
Vertical Forms Control (VFC) ........................................................... 73
HP 3000 Information............................................................................... 74
Feature Access and Transparent Modes ......................................... 74
VFC Download with a Serial Interface ............................................. 74
Carriage-Control Directives .............................................................. 75
Graphics ........................................................................................... 75
Printing in the Perforation Skip Region ............................................ 75
HP 1000 Information............................................................................... 76
Downloading VFC ............................................................................ 76
Perforation Skip Mode...................................................................... 76
3 P-Series Printer Emulation ................................... 77
Overview................................................................................................. 77
P-Series Default Values and States ................................................. 78
Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes ........................ 80
Format for Control Code Descriptions.............................................. 80
Switching Between the Emulations .................................................. 80
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) Header .............................. 81
SFCC Command Line ...................................................................... 81
Attribute Set and Reset Codes......................................................... 82
NUL Code ........................................................................................ 82
Print Modes Supported for Character Sets ...................................... 82
The Control Codes ........................................................................... 83
Backspace........................................................................................ 85
Bell ................................................................................................... 85
Bold Print.......................................................................................... 86
Bold Print Reset ............................................................................... 86
Carriage Return................................................................................ 87
Character Set Select ........................................................................ 88
Character Set Select: ECMA Latin 1 Extended................................ 90
Character Set Select: International Languages ............................... 91
Characters 80-9F (Control Codes) ................................................... 92
Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols) ............................................. 92
Table of Contents
Elongated (Double High) Print, One Line Only................................. 93
Elongated (Double High) Print, Set/Reset........................................ 94
Emphasized Print ............................................................................. 94
Emphasized Print Reset................................................................... 95
Emulation Reset ............................................................................... 95
Expanded Print (Double Wide), One Line Only................................ 96
Expanded Print (Double Wide), Set/Reset ....................................... 96
Extended Character Set ................................................................... 97
Extended Character Set Cancel (Primary Set Select)...................... 97
Form Feed........................................................................................ 98
Forms Length Set (Inches)...............................................................99
Forms Length Set (Lines)................................................................. 99
Line Feed .......................................................................................100
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)........................................................... 100
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)........................................................... 101
Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 lpi (1 Line Only) ......................................... 101
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch...................................................................102
Line Spacing n/72 Inch...................................................................103
Line Spacing n/216 Inch................................................................. 104
Overscoring .................................................................................... 104
Plot, Even Dot (P-Series High Density Graphics) .......................... 105
Plot, Odd Dot (P-Series Normal Density Graphics)........................ 105
Print Mode/Pitch Selection .............................................................106
Reverse .......................................................................................... 109
Superscript/Subscript Printing ........................................................ 110
Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset.............................................. 110
Underline ........................................................................................ 111
VFU Commands............................................................................. 111
Vertical Tab .................................................................................... 111
4 IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation .......................... 113
Overview............................................................................................... 113
Proprinter III XL Emulation Default Settings...................................114
Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes........... 116
Format for Control Code Descriptions............................................ 116
Escape Control Codes Overview ................................................... 116
Graphics Control Codes Overview ................................................. 117
Switching Between the Emulations ................................................119
The Control Codes ......................................................................... 120
Backspace...................................................................................... 122
Bell ................................................................................................. 122
Bit Image Mode, Single Density (Normal Speed)........................... 123
Table of Contents
Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Half Speed) .............................. 124
Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Normal Speed) ......................... 125
Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density (Half Speed) ......................... 126
Bold Printing ................................................................................... 127
Bold Printing, Cancel...................................................................... 127
Cancel ............................................................................................ 128
Carriage Return.............................................................................. 128
Carriage Return Set ....................................................................... 129
Character Pitch 12 cpi.................................................................... 129
Character Set Select: Set 1 (A) ...................................................... 129
Character Set Select: Set 2 (B) ...................................................... 129
Condensed Print ............................................................................ 130
Condensed Print, Cancel ............................................................... 130
Deselect Printer.............................................................................. 131
Double Wide Print .......................................................................... 131
Double Wide Print (One Line Only) ................................................ 132
Double Wide Print (One Line Only) Cancel.................................... 132
Emphasized Print ........................................................................... 133
Emphasized Print, Cancel.............................................................. 133
Form Feed...................................................................................... 134
Forms Length Set in Inches ........................................................... 134
Forms Length Set in Lines ............................................................. 135
Initialize Parameters....................................................................... 136
Line Feed ....................................................................................... 138
Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only) ........................................... 139
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)........................................................... 140
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (10.3 lpi).................................................... 140
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Executes) ................................................ 141
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Storage)................................................... 142
Line Spacing n/216 Inch................................................................. 143
Margin, Bottom ............................................................................... 144
Margin Cancel, Bottom................................................................... 144
Margins, Horizontal ........................................................................ 144
Overscoring .................................................................................... 145
Print All Characters ........................................................................ 145
Print Next Character....................................................................... 146
Print Mode ...................................................................................... 146
Print Quality.................................................................................... 147
Proportional Spacing ...................................................................... 147
Select Attributes ............................................................................. 148
Set Top-of-Form ............................................................................. 149
Superscript/Subscript Printing ........................................................ 150
Table of Contents
Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel........................................... 150
Tab, Horizontal ............................................................................... 151
Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal ............................................................... 151
Tab, Vertical ................................................................................... 152
Tab Set/Clear, Vertical ...................................................................153
Tabs, Clear All (Return to default).................................................. 153
Underline ........................................................................................ 154
Unidirectional Printing .................................................................... 154
5 Epson FX-1050 Emulation.................................. 155
Overview............................................................................................... 155
Epson FX-1050 Default Values and States.................................... 156
Epson Emulation Exceptions and Differences ............................... 158
Epson Character Sets .................................................................... 159
Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes ........... 160
Format for Control Code Descriptions............................................ 160
Escape Sequences ....................................................................... 160
Attribute Set and Reset Codes....................................................... 161
NUL Code ...................................................................................... 161
Switching Between the Emulations ................................................161
The Control Codes ......................................................................... 162
Backspace...................................................................................... 165
Bell ................................................................................................. 165
Cancel Line .................................................................................... 165
Carriage Return.............................................................................. 166
Character Pitch 10 CPI .................................................................. 166
Character Pitch 12 CPI .................................................................. 166
Character Pitch 15 CPI .................................................................. 166
Character Set Select: International Languages .............................167
Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 ......................................... 168
Condensed Print ............................................................................ 168
Condensed Print Reset .................................................................. 169
Cut-Sheet / Paper Feed Control..................................................... 169
Define a Download Character ........................................................ 169
Delete Character ............................................................................ 169
Double High Print, Set/Reset ......................................................... 170
Double Strike.................................................................................. 170
Double Strike, Cancel .................................................................... 171
Double Wide Print ..........................................................................171
Double Wide Print (One Line) ........................................................ 172
Double Wide Print (One Line), Cancel ........................................... 172
Emphasized Print ........................................................................... 173
Table of Contents
Emphasized Print, Cancel.............................................................. 173
Enable Printing Hex Codes 00-1F and 80-9F ................................ 173
Form Feed...................................................................................... 175
Graphics, Standard Density ........................................................... 175
Graphics, Double Density .............................................................. 176
Graphics, Double Density Double Speed....................................... 177
Graphics, Quadruple Density ......................................................... 178
Half Speed Mode, On/Off ............................................................... 178
Horizontal Tab Execute .................................................................. 179
Horizontal Tab Set/Release ........................................................... 179
Initialize Printer............................................................................... 180
Italic Printing................................................................................... 180
Italic Printing, Cancel ..................................................................... 180
Line Feed ....................................................................................... 181
Line Feed n/216 Inch ..................................................................... 181
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)........................................................... 182
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)........................................................... 182
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch................................................................... 183
Line Spacing n/216 Inch................................................................. 183
Line Spacing n/72 Inch................................................................... 184
Make Hex 80-9F Control Codes..................................................... 184
Make Hex 80-9F Printable ............................................................. 184
Master Print Select ......................................................................... 186
Paper Out Detection, Enable ......................................................... 186
Paper Out Detection, Disable......................................................... 187
Pass Bit 7 from Host ...................................................................... 187
Printer Select.................................................................................. 187
Printer Deselect.............................................................................. 187
Reassign Graphics Mode ............................................................... 188
Remove Downloaded Characters .................................................. 188
Select Graphics Mode .................................................................... 189
Select Italic Character Set.............................................................. 190
Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode .......................................................... 190
Select Print Quality......................................................................... 191
Select/Deselect Proportional Spacing ............................................ 191
Select Serif or Sans Serif Font ....................................................... 192
Select User-Defined Font ............................................................... 192
Select Vertical Tab Channel........................................................... 192
Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1/60 Inch ........................ 193
Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 ............................................ 193
Set Form Length in Inches ............................................................. 193
Set Form Length in Lines ............................................................... 194
Table of Contents
Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1/120 Inch ....................................... 195
Set Margin, Left .............................................................................. 195
Set Margin, Right ........................................................................... 195
Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1/120 Inch ....................... 196
Set Vertical Tabs in Channels ........................................................ 196
Skip Over Perforation ..................................................................... 197
Skip Over Perforation, Cancel........................................................ 197
Superscript and Subscript Printing ................................................. 198
Superscript and Subscript Printing, Cancel.................................... 198
Underline ........................................................................................ 199
Unidirectional Printing, 1 Line......................................................... 199
Unidirectional Printing, Set/Reset................................................... 199
Vertical Tab, Execute ..................................................................... 200
Vertical Tab, Set/Clear ...................................................................200
6 Graphics ............................................................. 201
Overview............................................................................................... 201
Bit Image Graphics ............................................................................... 201
Designing a Bit Image Pattern ....................................................... 203
Bit Image Density ........................................................................... 203
Bit Image Programming Format ..................................................... 204
Bit Image Sample Program ............................................................ 205
Plot Mode.............................................................................................. 206
Plot Density .................................................................................... 206
Plot Data Byte Format .................................................................... 207
Plot Data Line Format .................................................................... 208
Plotting the Data............................................................................. 210
Exiting from P-Series Plot Mode .................................................... 211
Combining Graphics and Text .............................................................. 212
Plot Data Byte Dot Patterns ........................................................... 213
7 Vertical Page Formatting .................................... 215
Overview............................................................................................... 215
Planning a Vertical Page Format .......................................................... 215
VFU Characteristics ....................................................................... 216
Proprinter and Epson Vertical Tab Table.............................................. 216
Executing Vertical Tabs ................................................................. 216
Vertical Tab Positions .................................................................... 217
P-Series EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit) ................................. 218
Start Load Code - Hex 1E .............................................................. 218
Channel Assignment ...................................................................... 218
End Load - Hex 1F ......................................................................... 218
Using the EVFU ............................................................................. 219
Table of Contents
Clearing the EVFU Memory ........................................................... 220
A Standard ASCII Character Set ........................... 221
B P-Series Emulation Character Sets.................... 223
Introduction ........................................................................................... 223
IBM PC, Primary Subset: ASCII (USA)................................................. 224
IBM PC, Primary Subset: French.......................................................... 225
IBM PC, Primary Subset: German........................................................ 226
IBM PC, Primary Subset: English (UK)................................................. 227
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Danish.......................................................... 228
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Swedish ....................................................... 229
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Italian ........................................................... 230
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Spanish........................................................ 231
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Japanese ..................................................... 232
IBM PC, Primary Subset: French Canadian ......................................... 233
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Latin American............................................. 234
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Danish II....................................................... 235
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Spanish II..................................................... 236
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Latin American II.......................................... 237
IBM PC, Extended Subset: 0437 PC Character Set............................. 238
IBM PC, Extended Subset: 0850 PC Multilingual ................................. 239
Multinational, ASCII (USA) ................................................................... 240
Multinational, EBCDIC .......................................................................... 241
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: ASCII (USA)....................................... 242
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: German .............................................. 243
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Swedish ............................................. 244
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Danish................................................ 245
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Norwegian.......................................... 246
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Finnish ............................................... 247
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: English (UK)....................................... 248
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Dutch.................................................. 249
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: French................................................ 250
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Spanish .............................................. 251
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Italian ................................................. 252
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Turkish ............................................... 253
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Japanese ........................................... 254
ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Multinational .................................... 255
ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Barcode 10 cpi ................................ 256
ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Greek .............................................. 257
ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Graphic............................................ 258
ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Scientific 10 cpi ............................... 259
DEC Multinational, ASCII (USA)........................................................... 260
Table of Contents
DEC Multinational, French.................................................................... 261
DEC Multinational, German .................................................................. 262
DEC Multinational, English (UK)........................................................... 263
DEC Multinational, Norwegian/Danish.................................................. 264
DEC Multinational, Swedish ................................................................. 265
DEC Multinational, Italian ..................................................................... 266
DEC Multinational, Spanish .................................................................. 267
DEC Multinational, Japanese ............................................................... 268
DEC Multinational, French Canadian ................................................... 269
DEC Multinational, Dutch...................................................................... 270
DEC Multinational, Finnish ...................................................................271
DEC Multinational, Swiss...................................................................... 272
OCR A .................................................................................................. 273
OCR B .................................................................................................. 274
C Proprinter Emulation Character Sets ................. 275
Introduction ........................................................................................... 275
0437 PC Character Set......................................................................... 276
0850 PC Multilingual............................................................................. 277
OCR A .................................................................................................. 278
OCR B .................................................................................................. 279
D Epson Emulation Character Sets ....................... 281
Introduction ........................................................................................... 281
0437 PC Character Set......................................................................... 282
0850 PC Multilingual............................................................................. 283
Epson Set, ASCII (USA) ....................................................................... 284
Epson Set, French ................................................................................285
Epson Set, German .............................................................................. 286
Epson Set, English (UK) ....................................................................... 287
Epson Set, Danish I .............................................................................. 288
Epson Set, Swedish.............................................................................. 289
Epson Set, Italian.................................................................................. 290
Epson Set, Spanish I ............................................................................ 291
Epson Set, Japanese............................................................................ 292
Epson Set, Norwegian ..........................................................................293
Epson Set, Danish II ............................................................................. 294
Epson Set, Spanish II ........................................................................... 295
Epson Set, Latin American I ................................................................. 296
Epson Set, French Canadian................................................................ 297
Epson Set, Latin American II ................................................................ 298
OCR A .................................................................................................. 299
OCR B .................................................................................................. 300
Table of Contents
1
Introduction
About This Guide
This manual explains how to work with the standard emulations equipped with your printer so that it works properly and efficiently.
The Technical Reference Manual is designed so that you can quickly find the information you need to use and configure your Hewlett-Packard
®
LineJet™ printer.
Warnings and Special Information
Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings:
Warning Warning messages call attention to situations that could hurt you or damage the equipment.
Caution Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment.
Note A note gives you helpful hints about printer operation and maintenance.
17
Chapter 1 About This Guide
Related Product Information
Refer to the following books for printer operation:
• LineJet Printers: User’s Guide
Provides configuration instructions and descriptions and troubleshooting guidelines.
• LineJet Printers: Quick Reference Guide
Describes the keys on the control panel and provides quick reference information on daily printer operations such as loading paper and replacing ribbons. Italian, French, German, and Spanish are included.
• LineJet Printers: Maintenance Manual
This manual is not shipped with the printer, but can be ordered. It explains how to maintain and repair the LineJet printer at the field service level of maintenance. This manual covers alignments and adjustments, preventive and corrective maintenance, troubleshooting, and basic principles of operation.
18
PCL-II
Software Features
This section outlines many of the features available with the software described in this manual.
PCL-II
The PCL ® -II emulation software provides the following features:
• Graphics and a selection of print densities. You can enable graphics mode and specify a density mode (dots per inch).
• Print Attributes. Characters can be bold, italic, double high, double wide, etc.
• Page Formatting. PCL-II commands allow you to set line spacing, page length, and vertical forms control.
• Font Typefaces. Also referred to as print modes. The five typefaces include Near Letter Quality (NLQ), Data Processing (DP), High Speed
(HS), OCR A, and OCR B.
• Character Sets. Forty-seven character sets are available. You can print the character sets in the different print modes. (OCR A and B character sets must be printed in OCR A and OCR B print modes.)
• Bar codes. Several bar codes are available, including Code 3 of 9,
Industrial 2 of 5, Interleaved 2 of 5, UPC A, EAN 8, EAN 13, UCC/EAN-
128, UPCE, Royal Mail (including KIX format), Postnet ® 11.3 cpi, and
Postnet 4 cpi.
P-Series
The P-Series emulation software provides the following features:
• Graphics and a selection of print densities. You can enable graphics mode and specify a density mode (dots per inch).
• Print Attributes. Characters can be bold, double high, double wide, etc.
• Page Formatting. Commands allow you to set line spacing, page length, and vertical tabbing.
• Font Typefaces. Also referred to as print modes. The five typefaces include: Near Letter Quality (NLQ) with or without serifs, Data Processing
(DP), High Speed (HS), OCR A, and OCR B.
• Different character sets are available. You can print the character sets in the different print modes. (OCR A and B character sets must be printed in
OCR A and OCR B print modes.)
19
Chapter 1 Software Features
Proprinter III XL
The Proprinter
®
emulation software provides the following features:
• Graphics and print densities. You can specify different graphics modes which use different dpi’s (dots per inch).
• Print Attributes. Characters can be bold, italic, double high, double wide, etc.
• Page Formatting. Commands allow you to set line spacing, page length, and vertical tabbing.
• Font Typefaces. Also referred to as print modes. The five typefaces include: Near Letter Quality (NLQ) with or without serifs, Data Processing
(DP), High Speed (HS), OCR A, and OCR B.
• Numerous character sets are available. You can print the character sets in the different print modes. (OCR A and B character sets must be printed in OCR A and OCR B print modes.)
Epson FX-1050
The Epson ® emulation software provides the following features:
• Graphics and print densities. You can enable graphics mode and specify a density mode (dots per inch).
• Print Attributes. Characters can be bold, italic, double high, double wide, etc.
• Page Formatting. Epson commands allow you to set line spacing, page length, and vertical tabbing.
• Font Typefaces. Also referred to as print modes. The five typefaces include: Near Letter Quality (NLQ) with or without serifs, Data Processing
(DP), High Speed (HS), OCR A, and OCR B.
• Character Sets. Thirty character sets are available. You can print the character sets in the different print modes. (OCR A and B character sets must be printed in OCR A and OCR B print modes.)
Installing Emulations
Flash memory is contained in SIMMs (single in-line memory modules) located on the controller board. Printer emulation and operating system software are loaded into flash memory at the factory, but you will install software in some situations:
• You buy the IGP ® /PGL ® or Code V™ graphics option after the printer is installed
• You need to upgrade printer software
• You need different emulation software
• You have replaced the controller board
• You have added or replaced the flash memory SIMM
20
Installing Emulations
Emulation and operating system software are stored as compressed files on more than one 3.5 inch floppy diskette. You will recombine the multiple files from the diskettes into one file on your computer’s hard disk in order to download the file to the printer. To assist in this process, the MS-DOS ® based program PKUNZIP ® is included on the last diskette with the program file.
You can load software through either the serial or parallel port of the printer.
The load commands are different, depending on the printer port you use.
These differences are explained in the note following step 26.
1.
Make a printout of all saved configurations. (Refer to your User’s Guide .)
Installing new software erases all saved configurations. You will use the printouts to restore printer configuration.
2.
Set the printer power switch to O (off).
3.
If the printer is already connected to the serial or parallel port of a computer capable of running an MS-DOS based PKZIP self-extracting file, go to step 9. If not, go to step 4.
4.
Unplug the AC power cord from the printer.
5.
Disconnect all data input cables from the printer interface. If the printer has an internal Ethernet interface card, do the following: a.
Cabinet models: remove the paper path
Pedestal models: remove the top cover assembly
(refer to your Maintenance Manual ).
b.
Unplug the Centronics I/O cable from the Ethernet interface card.
c.
Secure the loose end of the Centronics I/O cable to prevent the connector from contacting any other exposed components.
d.
Attach the parallel cable connector from the computer to the
Centronics I/O connector.
6.
Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial data cable to the
COM1 port of an IBM
®
-compatible computer that is using the PC-DOS™ or MS-DOS
®
operating system.
NOTE: You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port if the LPT1 port is already in use. The load commands are different if you use this port, as described in the note after step 26.
7.
Connect the data cable to the appropriate I/O port of the printer.
8.
Plug the AC power cord into the printer.
9.
Power on the computer.
10. Create a directory on your computer hard drive where you will store the recombined files from the emulation diskettes by typing the following at the DOS prompt:
MD DOWNLOAD<return>
11. Make the newly created directory the “active” directory by typing the following at the DOS prompt:
CD DOWNLOAD<return>
12. Insert the last diskette in the series (e.g., 2 of 2, 3 of 3, etc.) into diskette drive A (or B) of the computer.
21
Chapter 1 Software Features
13. Get the name of the compressed file on the diskette by typing the following at the DOS prompt:
DIR A:<return> (If the diskette is in drive B, type DIR B:<return>)
The compressed file on the diskette takes the form FILENAME.ZIP
, where the filename is a six digit number (e.g., 123456.zip).
14. At the DOS prompt type:
A:\PKUNZIP A:\ FILENAME (Replace A: with B: if you are using the B dirve), where FILENAME is the six digit number you noted in the previous step.
15. The PKUNZIP program will execute, and the following message will appear on the computer screen:
Insert disk #1 - Press a key when ready
16. Remove the diskette in the disk drive and insert the diskette labeled
Disk 1 of 2 (or 1 of 3, etc.)
17. Press the <return> key. After the file is decompressed to the hard drive, the following message will appear on the computer screen:
Insert disk #2 - Press a key when ready
18. Remove the diskette in the disk drive and insert the diskette labeled
Disk 2 of 2 (or 2 of 3, etc.)
19. Press the <return> key. If there are only two diskettes for the emulation, you will be returned to the DOS prompt when the decompression is complete. If there are three diskettes, you will be asked to insert disk #3 and press a key.
20. When all diskettes have been decompressed, type the following at the
DOS prompt:
DIR<return>
You will see a directory listing containing the file FILENAME.EXE
, where the filename is the six digit number (e.g., 123456.exe) you noted above.
This is the file you will download into the printer.
21. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ON LINE + PAPER
ADVANCE keys. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on.
Continue holding the ON LINE and PAPER ADVANCE keys down.
22. When you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD, release the ON LINE and PAPER ADVANCE keys.
NOTE: The port default is CENTRONICS; this is the standard load through the parallel port. If you want to use the default, continue at step 18.
23. Press the
<
(NEXT) key; “SELECT DOWNLOAD
PORT=DATAPRODUCT” appears on the LCD.
22
Installing Emulations
24. Press
<
(NEXT) again to cycle through the download ports available in the printer:
DATAPRODUCT (parallel)
CENTRONICS* (parallel) (default port)
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 9600 baud)
RS232-19.2K (RS-232 serial, 19200 baud)
RS232-38.4K (RS-232 serial, 38400 baud)
RS232-115K (RS-232 serial, 115000 baud)
RS422-9600 (RS-422 serial, 9600 baud)
RS422-19.2 (RS-422 serial, 19200 baud)
RS422-38.4K (RS-422 serial, 38400 baud)
RS422-115K (RS-422 serial, 115000 baud)
25. When the printer download port you want to use is displayed on the LCD, press ENTER. “WAITING DOWNLOAD / PORT = < your selection > appears on the display.
26. At the DOS prompt on the computer type:
FILENAME.EXE -pb<return> where FILENAME.EXE is the compressed file you noted in step 20. This command decompresses the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into the flash memory on the printer controller board.
NOTE: If you are loading the file using the LPT2 port on the computer, enter the following DOS command:
FILENAME.EXE -pb 2 <Return>
The 9600 baud rate is the only selection older versions of DOS can use. The baud rate information entered in the following DOS commands must match the selection you made in step 25.
If you are loading the file through the printer serial port, enter the following DOS commands:
MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1,P<Return>
FILENAME.EXE -pbc1<Return>
27. While the file is copied into memory, the printer LCD informs you of the load process and status. (LCD messages are listed in Table 1.)
28. When the new program has successfully loaded into memory and the printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (off).
29. Unplug the AC power cord from the printer.
30. Remove the diskette from the computer and store it with the printer.
31. Power off the computer.
32. If you had to install a data cable to the computer and printer in step 6, disconnect it from the computer and printer.
33. Reconnect the customer’s data input cable(s) to the printer, if required.
34. Return the printer to normal operation.
35. Using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 1, reconfigure the printer.
23
Chapter 1 Software Features
Table 1. Flash Memory Message Guide
Message
CLEARING PROGRAM
FROM FLASH
DIAGNOSTIC
PASSED
ERROR: DC
PROGRAM
NOT VALID
ERROR: DRAM AT
ADDRESS XXXXXXXX
ERROR: EC
PROGRAM
NOT VALID
ERROR: EC STOPPED
AT STATE XXXX
ERROR: FLASH
DID NOT PROGRAM
ERROR: NO DRAM
DETECTED
ERROR: FLASH
NOT DETECTED
ERROR: NVRAM
FAILURE
ERROR: PROGRAM
NEEDS MORE DRAM
ERROR: PROGRAM
NEEDS MORE FLASH
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT COMPATIBLE
Explanation Required Action
The program successfully loaded into printer RAM and the checksum matched.
The old program is now being deleted from flash memory.
The printer passed its memory and hardware initialization tests.
Printer cannot find the data controller program or the validation checksum is corrupt.
None
None
The printer found a defective memory location.
Printer cannot find the engine controller program or the validation checksum is corrupt.
Hardware fault in the engine controller.
The printer encountered an error trying to program flash memory.
The printer could not find any DRAM.
The printer could not find any flash memory.
The security PAL is not present or the non-volatile memory has failed.
The printer requires more DRAM memory in order to run the downloaded program.
The printer requires more flash memory in order to run the downloaded program.
Download the program again. If the message occurs again, call your service representative.
Call your service representative.
Download the program again. If the message occurs again, call your service representative.
Call your service representative.
Download the program again. If the message occurs again, call your service representative.
Call your service representative.
Call your service representative.
Call your service representative.
Add DRAM. Call your service representative.
The printer is not compatible with the downloaded program.
Add flash memory. Call your service representative.
Use the correct emulation software option(s) for this model.
24
Installing Emulations
ERROR: SECURITY
PAL NOT DETECTED
ERROR: SHORT AT
ADDRESS XXXX
ERROR: WRITING
TO FLASH
ERROR: WRONG
CHECKSUM
LOADING PROGRAM
FROM PORT XX%
LOADING PROGRAM
INTO FLASH
RESETTING . . .
PLEASE WAIT
RESTORING
BOOT CODE
SECURITY CODE
VIOLATION
Table 1. Flash Memory Message Guide (continued)
Message
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Explanation Required Action
The printer does not see a program in flash memory.
The security PAL is not present or has failed.
Hardware failure in DRAM or CMX controller circuitry.
Hardware or software fault in flash memory.
There is no program in printer memory.
Download program again.
Call your service representative.
Call your service representative.
The printer received the complete program but the checksum did not match. The data were corrupted during download.
The new program is loading into printer
RAM. XX indicates how much of the program has loaded.
The printer has deleted the previous program from flash memory and is loading the new program into flash memory.
The printer finished loading the program into flash memory and is automatically resetting itself.
None
None
Normal download initialization message.
None
Download the program again. If the message occurs again, call your service representative.
Download the program again. If the message occurs again, call your service representative.
None
SENDING PROGRAM
TO EC PROCESSOR
TABLE MISMATCH
DOWNLOAD AGAIN
The software running or being downloaded does not match the security
PAL code.
The printer is loading the engine controller program into the engine controller.
EC software update in progress.
Call your service representative.
None
Download the program again.
25
Chapter 1 Software Features
26
2
HP PCL-II
Introduction
This chapter describes the HP ® PCL-II emulation host control codes that are supported for your LineJet printer. Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language. A printer control language is the coding system used to convey, manipulate, and print data. It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation. In this manual, the terms emulation, printer protocol, and printer control language are synonymous.
In the HP PCL-II emulation mode, your printer can print files coded for the HP
PCL-II printer control language. To select the PCL-II emulation mode as the active printer emulation, select PCL-II in the ACTIVE EMULATION menu and then the PCL-II menu will appear under the EMULATION menu, as described in the LineJet Printers: User’s Guide .
The PCL-II emulation provides many configurable parameters. The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 2. You can modify the emulation parameter values in two ways:
• The PCL-II host control codes. An extensive set of PCL-II control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream. Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the
PCL-II control code commands.
• The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the PCL-II emulation parameters using the printer configuration menus and control panel keys as described in the LineJet Printers: User’s Guide .
A parameter value set by a host control code overrides a value set from the printer’s control panel.
Note Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer. The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the
LineJet Printers: User’s Guide.
27
Chapter 2 Introduction
HP PCL-II Emulation Default Settings
The factory settings for the PCL-II emulation menu options are shown in
Table 2. Host control codes can override the settings for these menu options.
Table 2. PCL-II Menu Option Factory Settings
Default Setting Parameter
Primary/Secondary Character Set
ID
Symbol Set
Pitch
Density
Page Length Representation
Graphics Density
Perforation Skip
Display Functions
LF after CR
CR after LF
CR after FF
CR after VT
PTX Linefeed
LPI Adjust
Page L. /Lines
Page L. /Inches
0
Roman-8(8U)
10.0 cpi
Data Processing
Inches/Page
60 dpi
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
6 LPI
66 lines
11 Inches
Switching Between the Emulations
The printer supports four emulations: PCL-II (the default), LinePrinter Plus ® ,
Code V™ and IGP/PGL. The LinePrinter Plus has three protocols from which to choose: P-Series, Proprinter III XL, and Epson FX-1050.
You can switch between PCL-II and any of the LinePrinter Plus protocols by sending one of the following commands:
ESC%-00000X
ESC%-00001X
ESC%-00002X
SFCC|};K0
Switches from PCL-II to P-Series
Switches from PCL-II to Proprinter III XL
Switches from PCL-II to Epson FX-1050
Switches from any of the LinePrinter Plus emulations to PCL-II
28
Printer Feature Set Compatibility
Note The SFCC is the Special Function Control Code. From the
P-Series protocol, this code is selectable from the front panel. The default value is hex 01. For the Proprinter and
Epson emulations, the SFCC is always the ESC (hex 1B) character.
Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
The remainder of this chapter describes the PCL-II printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer.
The escape (ESC) control code is used to select most of the programmable features.
Commands and control codes sent from a host system override settings in the configuration menus. However, any configuration settings from host control codes will be gone once the printer is powered off (or reset to the default values). Host control codes are never reflected in the PCL-II configuration menu. In order to save a configuration, it is necessary to select the desired options from the front panel and save the options to one of the printers eight user-selectable configurations. The LineJet Printers: User’s Guide describes the menu option for saving changes to the printer memory.
Printer Feature Set Compatibility
The printer uses the “Printer Control Language” which standardizes printer features and user access of these features, providing compatibility between
HP printers. “Printer Control Language” structure consists of five feature levels:
• Level I
• Level II
Print and Space
EDP
• Level III
• Level IV
• Level V
Word Processing
Page Formatting
Enhanced Page Formatting
Each PCL level supersedes features of the levels below it. The LineJet printers are Level II printers, meaning that all applications for Level I and II printers will operate correctly on your printer with no modifications. In addition to supporting Level I and Level II features, the printer supports a limited set of additional features that may not be supported by other HP products.
Applications written using these additional features may not operate as intended on other Hewlett-Packard printers which do not have these capabilities.
29
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
General Information
Programmatic Printer Control
Control codes, multi-character escape sequences, and parameterized escape sequences are all used to control the printers.
The printers execute parameters sequentially, in the order they are received.
Therefore, the order of the parameters is significant. Unrecognized escape sequences are ignored in their entirety and may cause erroneous printing since the printer may be unable to perform the requested operation.
Logical and Physical Pages
The limits of the logical page determine the area in which printing can take place. Logical page length is set programmatically (in lines per page).
Physical page length is set via the control panel and indicates the actual size of a single page. The physical page length cannot be changed programmatically. Refer to the LineJet Printers: Quick Reference Guide for more information.
Function
Backspace
Horizontal
Tab
Line Feed
Form Feed
Carriage
Return
Shift Out
Symbol
BS
HT
LF
FF
CR
Table 3. Control Codes
Binary Level
1000
1001
II
V
1010
1100
1101 I
I
I
Description
Move one column left.
Move the current active position to the next tab stop on the current line. The tab stops are at the left margin and every 8th column between the left and right margins. If new position crosses the right margin, the new position is set to the right margin.
Move to next print line while maintaining current column position
Move to first line at top of the next page while maintaining current column position
Move to the left margin on current print line
SO 1110 I
Shift In SI
Escape ESC
1111
11011
I
I
Select following characters from the current secondary character font until receipt of a
Shift In
Select following characters from the current primary character font until receipt of a Shift
Out
The following characters are a special control sequence
30
Escape Sequences
Escape Sequences
An escape sequence consists of the ESC control code followed by one or more characters in succession. Both two-character and parameterized escape sequences control the printer. Two-character escape sequences take the form ESCX, where X is a character from the ASCII table (0 through ~).
Parameterized escape sequences are structured in the following form:
ESCXy[parameter]Z
This sequence is explained below:
ESCXy Prefix. This part of the escape sequence indicates that the escape sequence is parameterized and also specifies which type of control is being performed. “X” is referred to as the parameterized character; “y” is referred to as the group character.
Parameter This string of ASCII characters specifies a value (either numeric or alphanumeric).
Z Terminator. This ASCII character indicates the function to which the previous parameter value applies. If this character is lower case (a,b,c, etc.), it indicates a combined escape sequence, meaning that more parameterized information will follow. If the character is upper case (A,B,C, etc.), it terminates the escape sequence string.
Note Brackets [ ] are shown in many of the escape sequences for clarification purposes, but are not actually part of the escape sequence. For example, the brackets in the escape sequence for selecting page length (ESC&l[1-128]P) specify a range of values (1 through 128) for page length. To specify a page length of 35 lines, the escape sequence ESC&l35P would be sent to the printer.
Combining Escape Sequences
Parameterized escape sequences can be combined to save keystrokes.
Combining sequences involves adding the parameter value and terminator of one or more sequences to another escape sequence. Parameterized sequences can be combined only if their prefixes are identical. When a parameter/terminator of one sequence is added to another sequence, all of the terminators except the last should be lower case. For example, to set the left and right margins using two separate escape sequences, the following two sequences would be sent:
Set left margin at position 10
Set right margin at position 99
ESC&a10L
ESC&a99M
Using one combined escape sequence, the following would be sent to the printer:
ESC&a10l99M
31
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
The list below shows the escape sequences you can use with the printer.
Note that the brackets [ ] used in these escape sequences are for clarification purposes only (the brackets are not actually part of the commands).
FUNCTION
PCL LEVEL I
ASCII CODE PAGE
Display Functions Mode on
Display Functions Mode off
Perforation Skip Mode on
Perforation Skip Mode off
Raster Graphics end
Self-test
Stroke Weight (Bold)
Underline Mode on
Underline Mode off
ESCY
ESCZ
ESC&l1L
ESC&l0L
Print Mode Selection (10 & 16.67 cpi) ESC&l[0,2]S
Programmable reset ESCE
Raster Graphics start
Raster Graphics data
ESC*rA
ESC*b[#]W[ data ]
ESC*rB
ESCz
69
71
ESC[(,)]s[#]B 71
ESC&d[DEFGLMNOTUVW\}^] 72
ESC&d[@CHIJKPQRSWXZ[] 72
58
60
69
69
55
55
57
57
PCL LEVEL II
Character Font Selection
Cursor Control (absolute row)
Cursor Control (absolute column)
Cursor Control (relative row)
Cursor Control (relative column)
Horizontal Margin Selection (Left)
PCL LEVEL III
ESC[(,)] ID
ESC&a[#]R
ESC&a[#]C
ESC&a[+#]R
ESC&a[+/-#]C
ESC&a[ print position ]L
Horizontal Margin Selection (Right) ESC&a[
Horizontal Margin Selection (Reset) ESC9 print position ]M
Line Spacing
Logical Page Length Selection
ESC&l[6,8]D
ESC&l[1-128]P
Print Pitch Selection ESC[(,)]s[ Cpi ]H
Text Length (Vertical Margin) Selection ESC&l[1-128]F
Transparent Print Data ESC&p[ # of bytes ]X
54
55
55
55
50
54
54
54
56
56
58
72
72
Character Density Selection
Character Style Selection
Print Mode Selection (12 cpi)
ESC[(,)]s[0,1,-1]Q
ESC[(,)]s[0,1]S
ESC&l4S
47
53
58
32
Escape Sequences
Additional Commands
Bar Code Data
Bar Code Height
Bar Code Header Control
Bar Code Label Placement
Bar Code Selection
Emulation Switching
Print Mode Selection (double size)
PTX Linefeed
ESC*z[< bar code data> ]Z
ESC*z[#]H
ESC*z[#]Q
ESC*z[#]C
ESC*z[#]V
ESC%-[0000,0001,0002]X
ESC&l8S
ESC*t[0,1]L
Programmable VFC ESC&l[ #bytes ]W[ data ]
Raster Graphics: Move # raster lines ESC*b[#]Y
Raster Graphics: Resolution ESC*t[70,140]R
Raster Graphics: Horizontal ResolutionESC*r[60,70,120,140]L
Raster Graphics: Vertical Resolution ESC*r[72,144]V
Standard (Computed) VFC ESC&l[0-16]V
60
69
69
69
69
73
34
28
58
59
34
34
34
34
33
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Bar Codes
To print bar codes, escape sequences are sent to the printer specifying the type of code, bar code height, bar code header information, placement information, and bar code data. The following five escape sequences are used for bar code printing:
ESC*z#V Bar Code Selection
This sequence selects the type of bar code to be used in subsequent printing of bar code data. If a number other than those available is selected, the previously selected bar code type will be used. The following table lists the bar code types available and their corresponding value field numbers.
Table 4. Bar Code Types
Bar Code Type
Code 3 of 9 (default)
Industrial 2 of 5
Interleaved 2 of 5
UPC A
UPC E
EAN 8
EAN 13
UCC/EAN-128
Postnet
Royal Mail (including KIX format)
Character Length
Variable
Variable
Variable
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Variable
Value Field No.
9
10
11
12
4
8
0
1
13, 14
15, 16
Note The Postnet Barcodes type 13 & 14 print 24 bars per inch.
See the section on 256x Postal Barcodes for information on the 20 bars per inch and 22.5 bars per inch Postal Barcodes.
ESC*z#H Bar Code Height
This escape sequence defines the height of the bar code label in tenths of an inch as specified in the value field (#). To specify a bar code height of .8 inches, the ESC*z8H escape sequence would be sent to the printer. A zero in the value field specifies that bar code height is determined by the current line spacing (1/6 or 1/8 inch for 6/8 LPI respectively, or 1/3 or 1/4 inch for doublehigh/double-wide). The default bar code height is 0.6 inches.
34
Bar Codes
ESC*z#C Bar Code Label Placement
This escape sequence specifies the horizontal starting location of a bar code by specifying the column number based on the currently active print pitch.
The value field (#) indicates the absolute column position the bar code will begin printing. A plus or minus sign in the value field is ignored. A value field whose position is less than the current active printing position is illegal and causes the cursor to move to the next column position to the right of the current active printing position. When printing bar codes, always allow at least
1/4 inch margin in all directions from each bar code. This will limit the interference from other characters and help readability. If you need to print text and bar codes on the same line, see the “Printing Bar Codes With Text” discussion later in this chapter.
ESC*z#Q Bar Code Header Control
This sequence specifies the placement of the bar code header. A number 1 in the value field specifies that a header will be printed above the bar code label and a 2 specifies that it will be placed below the bar code. A zero in the value field specifies that no header will be printed. The printer default places the header above the bar code.
ESC*z<Bar Code Data>Z Bar Code Label Data
This sequence sends the bar code label data in the form of an alphanumeric string enclosed in angled brackets. The header (if enabled) will print in the location specified by the bar code header control sequence.
Note Upon termination of the bar code label data escape sequence, the printer will print all buffered bar code data and generate a carriage return.
The printer automatically formats the bar code, inserts start and stop bits, and calculates and inserts the checksum (if applicable-not for Code 3 of 9,
Industrial 2 of 5, or Interleaved 2 of 5 ).
For UPC E bar codes, a zero (0) must be in the first position of the bar code data.
35
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Printing Bar Codes
Generally, sending bar code information to the printer is performed in two steps:
Step 1: Selecting the bar code printing specifications; bar code type, height, and header control information.
Step 2: Moving the cursor to the desired label location and sending the bar code data.
Step 1.
Before positioning and printing the bar code data, the type of code, height of the label, and header placement may be specified. Once this is done, the succeeding labels will be printed using these specifications until a new type, height, or header control is specified. In other words, the bar code print specifications can be sent once and need not be sent again unless the printer is reset or new print specifications are desired. The following example specifies the print specifications for bar codes that are 0.5 inches in height, have a header above the label, and are printed in the UPC A code.
ESC*z8v5h1Q
ESC*z8v Select UPC A code
5h Label is to be .5 inches high
1Q Places header above bar code
Notice that the last letter in the escape sequence (Q) is upper-case while the other letters in the sequence (v and h) are lower-case. (See “Escape
Sequences” on page 31 for more information concerning combining two or more sequences.)
Step 2.
To print a bar code label, the cursor must be placed in the desired position and the bar code data must be sent. The following escape sequence moves the cursor to column 25, sends the data “1234567” to the printer, and initiates printing.
ESC*z25c<1234567>Z
ESC*z25c Places start of label at column 25
< Indicates start of bar code data
1234567 Bar code data
> Signals end of bar code data
Z Upper case Z initiates printing *
*Note that an upper-case “Z” terminator results in the bar code being printed and an automatic carriage return (CR) being executed.
36
Bar Codes
Printing Multiple Labels On The Same Line
Printing more than one label on the same line involves no more than positioning the cursor and sending the data for each label to be printed. Since the termination of the bar code data sequence (signalled by an upper-case Z) causes the bar code to be printed and a carriage return to be executed, all of the label information must be sent in the same escape sequence. The following example shows an escape sequence used to print three labels on a single line:
ESC*z5c<label1>z20c<label2>z35c<label3>Z
ESC*z5c Moves cursor to column 5
<label1> Bar code data z20c Moves cursor to column 20
<label2> Bar code data z35c Moves cursor to column 35
<label3> Bar code data
Z Initiates printing
Printing Bar Codes With Text
When printing bar codes with text, since the printer automatically generates a carriage return and line feed at the end of the terminating character (upper case Z), potential problems exist. As a general rule, for each line of bar code mixed with text, send the text information first, followed by a carriage return without a line feed (ASCII 13), and then overlay the bar code. (The carriage return is required so that the bar code cursor position will be correct.) The following example illustrates how to print text and bar codes on the same line.
This example involves a three-line bar code (and three escape sequences) as shown below:
ESC*z0v25c1q<12345>Z
ESC*z0v Selects Code 3 of 9
25c Moves cursor to column 25
1q Specifies header placement above label
<12345> Bar code data
Z Enables printing this portion of the bar code
ESC*z75CThis is textCRESC*z0q25c<12345>Z
ESC*z75C Moves cursor to column 75
This is text Text for right of bar code
CR Carriage return without a line feed
ESC*z0q Disables header for this portion
25c Moves cursor to column 25
<12345> Bar code data
Z Initiates printing this portion
ESC*z25c0q<12345>Z
ESC*z25c Moves cursor to column 25
0q Disables header for lower portion
<12345> Bar code data
Z Initiates printing for lower portion of label
37
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Note When a header is enabled, sending one line of information causes the printer to print two lines; one line containing the header along with any text you may have sent in that line, and one line containing the bar code label. When a header is enabled, no information can be printed on the same line as the bar code label. However, if the header is disabled, text can be placed next to the bar code label. For example, if you want a label and also wish to enclose the bar code with a box, you may not use automatic headers. Instead, you may set the height of the bar code to the text height and manually print the header.
Bar Code Width Information
The following paragraphs contain information concerning the size of the printed bar codes. If you are designing a form that contains bar codes, this information may prove useful in judging how much space the bar code will occupy.
The following table lists the number of characters sent by the user for each type of bar code:
Table 5. Bar Code Character
Bar Code Number of Characters Sent
Code 3 of 9
Industrial 2 of 5
Interleaved 2 of 5
UPCA
UPCE
EAN8
EAN13
UCC/EAN-128
Variable
Variable
Variable
11
11
7
12
19
Postnet 5 (6), 9(10), or 11(12)
Royal Mail (incl. KIX) Variable
Note For Postnet Barcodes printed using the LineJet style, if 5, 9, or 11 digits are sent, your printer will automatically calculate and print the check digit. If 6, 10, or 12 digits are sent, the printer will verify the check digit. Should the check digit be inaccurate, or an invalid bar code length is sent, your LineJet printer will not attempt to print the invalid data.
38
Bar Codes
CODE 3 OF 9
A variable-length data string of up to 32 ASCII characters may be printed using the Code 3 of 9 bar code. The string may be an odd or even length and may use any of the standard characters (specified in MIL-STD-1189). If a non-valid character is used in the string, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. The width of the printed bar code can be approximated by the following equation:
Width in inches = (number of characters)/3.14 + 0.50
INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5
A variable-length data string of up to 32 ASCII characters may be printed using the Industrial 2 of 5 bar code. The string may be an odd or even length and may use any character from 0 through 9. If a non-valid character is used in the string, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. Optional checksums are not inserted in the bar code. The width of the printed bar code can be approximated by the following equation:
Width in inches = (number of characters)/3.7 + 0.38
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5
A variable-length data string of up to 32 ASCII characters may be printed using the Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code. The string may be an odd or even length. However, if the string is an odd length, a leading zero will be inserted to make a string of an even length. Valid data characters are 0 through 9. If a non-valid character is used in the string, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. Optional checksums are not inserted in the bar code. The width of the printed bar code can be approximated by the following equations:
Width in inches = (even number of characters)/6.25 + 0.15
UPCA
A fixed-length data string of 11 ASCII characters may be printed using the
UPC A bar code. The string must have a length of 11 and may use any of the standard characters 0 through 9. If a non-valid character or string length is used, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. The width of the printed bar code does not vary and is 1.56 inches.
UPCE
A fixed-length data string of 11 ASCII characters may be printed using the
UPC E bar code. The string length must be 11 and may use any of the standard characters 0 through 9 (however, the data pattern must meet the format of UPC E bar codes; UPC E is a shortened version of very specific patterns printable with UPC A). If a non-valid character or string length is used, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. For UPC E, a zero (0) is required in the first position of the bar code data (the number system character). The width of the printed bar code is not variable and is 0.81 inches.
39
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
EAN8
A fixed-length data string of 7 ASCII characters may be printed using the EAN
8 bar code. The string length must be 7 and may use any of the standard characters 0 through 9. If a non-valid character or string length is used, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. The width of the printed bar code is not variable and is
1.25 inches.
EAN13
A fixed-length data string of 12 ASCII characters may be printed using the
EAN 13 bar code. The string length must be 12 and may use any of the standard characters 0 through 9. If a non-valid character or string length is used, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. The width of the printed bar code is not variable and is 1.56 inches.
Royal Mail
A variable length data string may be printed using the “Royal Mail 4 State
Customer Code”. The string may use any character from 0 through 9 and alpha characters A through Z. A complete bar code consists of a set of distinct bars and spaces for each character followed by a checksum character and enclosed by a unique start bar, stop bar and quiet zone. A second version of the Royal Mail barcode prints with no stop bar, start bar or checksum character.
The KIX format for Royal Mail does not include the start/stop code or the check digit, but will allow lowercase alpha characters a through z.
UCC/EAN 128
The UCC/EAN-128 bar code contains special characters which use unique codes to identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code. EAN/UCC 128 supports a full ASCII character set and provides standard alphanumeric keyboard characters and control and special characters.
The EAN/UCC 128 data structure requires an Application Identifier (AI) at the beginning of barcode data. Each AI determines the format and length of the data which follows. Refer to Table 6 for more detail.
Table 6. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers
Application
Identifier (AI)
00
02
10
11 (*)
13 (*)
Content
Serial Shipping Container Code
Item Num. of Goods Within Another Unit
Batch or Lot Number
Production Date (YYMMDD)
Packaging Date (YYMMDD)
Format n2+n18 n2+n14 n2+an..20
n2+n6 n2+n6
40
Bar Codes
Table 6. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)
Application
Identifier (AI)
328 (***)
329 (***)
330 (***)
331 (***)
332(***)
333 (***)
334 (***)
335 (***)
320 (***)
321 (***)
322 (***)
323 (***)
324 (***)
325 (***)
326 (***)
327 (***)
336 (***)
337 (***)
340 (***)
341 (***)
30
310 (***)
311 (***)
312 (***)
313 (***)
314 (***)
315 (***)
316 (***)
15 (*)
17 (*)
20
21
22
23 (**)
240
250
Content
Sell By Date (Quality) (YYMMDD)
Expiration Date (Safety) (YYMMDD)
Product Variant
Serial Number
HIBCC = Quantity, Date, Batch and Link
Lot Number (Transitional Use)
Additional Product ID Assigned By Manufacturer
Secondary Serial Number
Quantity
Net Weight, Kilograms
Length or 1st Dimension, Meters
Width, Diameter or 2nd Dimension, Meters
Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Meters
Area, Square Meters
Volume, Liters
Volume, Cubic Meters
Net Weight, Pounds
Length or 1st Dimension, Inches
Length or 1st Dimension, Feet
Length or 1st Dimension, Yards
Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Inches
Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Feet
Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Yards
Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Inches
Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Feet
Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Yards
Gross Weight-Kilograms
Length or 1st Dimension, Logistics
Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Meters, Logistics
Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Meters, Logistics
Area, Square Meters, Logistics
Gross Volume, Liters
Gross Volume, Cubic Meters
Kilograms Per Square Meter
Gross Weight, Pounds
Length or 1st Dimension, Inches, Logistics
Format n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n2+n..8
n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n2+n6 n2+n6 n2+n2 n2+an..20
n2+an..29
n3+n..19
n3+an..30
n3+an..30
41
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Table 6. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)
Application
Identifier (AI)
368 (***)
369 (***)
37
400
401
410
411
412
360 (***)
361 (***)
362 (***)
363 (***)
364 (***)
365 (***)
366 (***)
367 (***)
350 (***)
351 (***)
352 (***)
353 (***)
354 (***)
355 (***)
356 (***)
357 (***)
342 (***)
343 (***)
344 (***)
345 (***)
346 (***)
347 (***)
348 (***)
349 (***)
413
414
420
Content
Length or 1st Dimension, Feet, Logistics
Length or 1st Dimension, Yards, Logistics
Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Inches, Logistics
Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Feet, Logistics
Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Yards, Logistics
Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Inches, Logistics
Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Feet, Logistics
Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Yards, Logistics
Area, Square Inches
Area, Square Feet
Area, Square Yards
Area, Square Inches, Logistics
Area, Square Feet, Logistics
Area, Square Yards, Logistics
Net Weight, Troy Ounce
Net Volume, Ounces
Volume, Quarts
Volume, Gallons
Gross Volume, Quarts
Gross Volume, Gallons
Volume, Cubic Inches
Volume, Cubic Feet
Volume, Cubic Yards
Gross Volume, Cubic Inches
Gross Volume, Cubic Inches
Gross Volume, Cubic Inches
Quantity of Units Contained (For Use With AI 02 Only)
Customer’s Purchase Order Number
Consignment Number
Ship To (Deliver To) Location Code Using EAN-13
Bill To (Invoice To) Location Code Using EAN-13
Purchase From (Location Code of Party From Whom Goods Are
Purchased)
Ship For UCC/EAN Location Code
EAN Location Code For Physical Identification
Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code Within a Single Postal Authority
Format n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n2+n..8
n3+an..30
n3+an..30
n3+n13 n3+n13 n3+n13 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n4+n6 n3+n13 n3+n13 n3+an..20
42
US Postnet Barcodes
Table 6. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)
Application
Identifier (AI)
92
93
94
95
8101
8102
90
91
96
97
98
99
421
8001
8003
8004
8005
8006
8018
8100
Content Format
Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code With 3-Digit ISO Country Code Prefix
Roll Products-Width, Length, Core Diameter, Direction and Splices
UPC/EAN Number and Serial Number or Returnable Asset
UCC/EAN Serial Identification
Identifies the Price Per Unit of Measure
Component of an Article
Service Relation Number
Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character and Offer n3+n3+an..9
n4+n14 n4+n14+an..16
n4+an..30
n4+n6 n4+n14+n2+n2 n4+n18 n4+n1+n5
Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character, Offer and End of Offer n4+n1+n5+n4
Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character Preceded by Zero n4+n1+n1
Mutually Agreed, Between Trading Partners
Intra-Company (Internal) n2+an..30
n2+an..30
Intra-Company (Internal)
Intra-Company (Internal)
Intra-Company (Internal)
Internal-Carriers n2+an..30
n2+an..30
n2+an..30
n2+an..30
Internal-Carriers
Intra-Company (Internal)
Intra-Company (Internal)
Internal n2+an..30
n2+an..30
n2+an..30
n2+an..30
(*)To indicate only year and month, DD must be filled with “00”
(**) Plus one digit for length indication
(***) Plus one digit for decimal point indication
Data Value Representation: a - alphabetic characters an - alpha-numeric characters an..3 - up to 3 alpha-numeric characters n - numeric characters n3 - 3 numeric characters, fixed length n..3 - up to 3 numeric characters
US Postnet Barcodes
The LineJet printer can print barcodes in three different formats. The default,
24 bars per inch, uses the same syntax as the other barcodes. It is suggested to use the ESC*Z0Q command to disable placement of a header on postal barcodes. The LineJet printer will also print barcodes using the 256X format for 20 and 22.5 bars per inch postal barcodes. See the section on 256X - US
Barcodes for more details. LineJet style Postnet barcodes will automatically generate the check digit if it is not present. The 256X-compatibility barcodes require the host to generate the check digit. If a non-valid character or string length is used, a blank non-readable bar code will be printed; non-valid characters are not substituted or deleted. The width of the printed bar code is not variable and is 1.33 (5 digit), 2.17 (9 digit), or 2.59 (11 digit) inches.
43
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
256X US POSTNET BAR CODE
The US POSTNET Bar Code is an HP character set which meets the US
Postal Office specifications for Postnet bar coding, including the latest
Delivery Point Bar Code, or DPBC.
US POSTNET Bar Codes print at 4.0 cpi (20 bars per inch) and 11.3 cpi (22.5 bars per inch). Both bar codes are printed by replacing normal printable characters with vertical bars. Both options use different characters to represent the desired bar codes, as a result the methods by which they are produced are incompatible.
11.3 CPI (22.5 Bars per inch) US POSTNET BAR CODE
FONT SELECTION
You may select either of the US POSTNET character sets from either the front panel or through escape sequences. (Refer to the User’s Guide for details on front panel menus.)
The following escape sequence will configure the 11.3 cpi POSTNET BAR
CODE as a secondary font:
ESC)1KESC)s11.3H
The sequence above sets the secondary font symbol set to 11.3 cpi
POSTNET BAR CODE, and sets the pitch to 11.3 cpi. Once the Secondary character set is configured for 11.3 cpi Postnet Bar Codes, the Shift Out command can be used to activate the bar codes:
Shift Out: hex 0E
After the bar code is printed, the normal print mode is activated by using the
Shift In command:
Shift In: hex 0F
Note It is recommended setting the US POSTNET Bar Code character set as the secondary set, with the normal operation mode as the primary font.
Printing 11.3 CPI US POSTNET Bar Code Information
The US POSTNET BAR CODES represent digits 0 - 9 with five vertical bars.
Each digit consists of two long bars (1’s) and three short bars (0’s). The
Delivery Point Bar Code font is designed to be printed only at 11.3 cpi or 22.5 bars per inch. A Delivery Point Bar Code is an eleven digit postal code. (For five or nine postal bar codes, use the 4.0 cpi US POSTNET Bar Code.)
The eleven numeric characters are : ZIP + 4 + 2
To make the bar code scannable, you must add a check digit and frame bars.
The check digit is calculated by adding all of the digits and subtracting the sum from the next highest multiple of ten. Consequently, the sum of the eleven digits, and the check digit, will be an even multiple of ten.
44
US Postnet Barcodes
The printer does not calculate the check digit, or automatically generate frame bars. They must be generated by the computer resident software, and sent to the printer. To do this, it is necessary to design a program that will convert a pair of digits into ten vertical bars..
Frame
Bar 0 1 2 3 4 - 5 6 7 8 - 9 1
Correction
Digit
Frame
Bar
1 11000 00011 00101 00110 01001 01010 01100 10001 10010 10100 00011 00101 1
00 =
= \ (5C/h)
01 =
= ~ (7E/h) = } (7D/h)
10 =
= { (7B/h)
11 =
= ‘ (60/h) = ^ (5E/h)
Note Each digit is five bars, with each printable character being two bars. Thus, 2 1/2 characters are needed to print one digit.
Perform the following steps to determine the check digit for 45834-8844-70:
1.
Calculate the check digit:
Add the digits of the postal code: 4+5+8+3+4+8+8+4+4+7+0 = 51
2.
Subtract from the next highest multiple of ten:
60-51 = 9
The check digit is 9.
The barcode can be created one of two ways. The first, uses the frame bars as separate characters, the second “links” the frame bars to the first and last characters.
Frame Bar:
Characters “45”:
Characters “83”:
Characters “48”:
Characters “84”:
Characters “47”:
Characters “09”:
Frame Bar:
Text sent to Printer:
\
Method 1:
}~{{{
{}~}{
}~`~{
{}~{}
}~}~}
`~}}~
^
(1)
(01001 01010)
(10010 00110)
(01001 10010)
(10010 01001)
(01001 10001)
(11000 10100)
(1)
SO\}~{{{{}~}{}~`~{{}~{}}~}~}`~}}~^SI
45
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Frame Bar & “4”:
Characters “58”:
Characters “34”:
Characters “88”:
Characters “44”:
Characters “79”:
“9” & Frame Bar:
Text sent to Printer:
Method 2:
{{}
}}}~{
~`~{}
{}}~{
}~{{}
{~`{~
{{}
(1 01001)
(01010 10010)
(00110 01001)
(10010 10010)
(01001 01001)
(10001 11000)
(10100 1)
SO{{}}}}~{~`~{}{}}~{}~{{}{~`{~{{}SI
For both examples, SO = Shift Out (hex 0E), and SI = Shift In (hex 0F).
4.0 CPI (20 Bars per inch) US POSTNET Bar Code
FONT SELECTION
You may select either of the US POSTNET character sets from the front panel, or through escape sequences. (Refer to your User’s Guide for details on front panel menus.)
The following escape sequence will configure the 4.0 cpi POSTNET BAR
CODE as a secondary font:
ESC)0K
ESC)0KESC)s4.0H
(Compatible with 256XC series printers.)
(Compatible with C235XA series printers.)
The sequence above sets the secondary font symbol set to 4.0 cpi POSTNET
BAR CODE, and sets the pitch to 4.0 cpi. Once the Secondary character set is configured for 4.0 CPI Postnet Bar Codes, the Shift Out command can be used to activate the bar codes:
Shift Out: hex 0E
After the bar code is printed, the normal print mode is activated by using the
Shift In command:
Shift In: hex 0F
Note It is recommended setting the US POSTNET Bar Code character set as the secondary set, with the normal operation mode as the primary font.
Perform the following steps to determine the check digit for 45834-8844-70:
1.
Calculate the check digit:
Add the digits of the postal code: 4+5+8+3+4+8+8+4+4+7+0 = 51
2.
Subtract from the next highest multiple of ten:
60 - 51 = 9
The check digit is 9.
3.
Text sent to Printer:
SONUL458348844709.SI
SO = Shift Out (hex 0E)
NUL = Nul (hex 00)
SI = Shift In (hex 0F)
46
Character Density Selection
Character Density Selection
(PCL Level III)
Standard-density print, high-density print, and high-speed draft printing can be specified using the following escape sequences:
Primary Selection
ESC(s0Q Select Standard-Density (12 x 9 dot matrix, 120 x 72 dpi) for the primary font
ESC(s1Q Select High-Density (18 x 12 dot matrix, 180 x 96 dpi) for the primary font
ESC(s-1Q Select High-speed Draft Printing (12 x 6 dot matrix, 120 x 48 dpi) for the primary font
Secondary Selection
ESC)s0Q Select Standard-Density (12 x 9 dot matrix, 120 x 72 dpi) for the secondary font
ESC)s1Q Select High-Density (18 x 12 dot matrix, 180 x 96 dpi) for the secondary font
ESC)s-1Q Select High-speed Draft Printing (12 x 6 dot matrix, 120 x 48 dpi) for the secondary font
The default density is that of the default font specified from the control panel.
If the symbol set selected is not available in the requested density, the printer will print blank space. However, OCR-A, OCR-B, and Postal Barcodes force density changes to ensure scanability.
When draft printing is selected, the printer prints less dots vertically (5 dots).
This reduction in dots results in an increase in print speed of up to 30%.
ESC(0UESC(s10h0s-1Q
To cue high-speed draft with Roman Extension:
ESC(0EESC(s10h0s-1Q
The following table lists all the Symbol Sets available to the PCL II Emulation.
Each Symbol Set is followed by its selection Code, and the Densities(Pitches) that it is available in. With the exception of OCR-A and OCR-B, selecting a symbol set in a Density combination not listed in the chart below will result in spaces being printed in place of the desired character.
47
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Name
Line Draw Set
ISO Den/Nor
Roman Ext
ISO UK
ISO France
ISO German
Hebrew
Japanese ASCII
Katakana
Block Char
OCR-A
OCR-B
ISO Swe/Fin
Roman-8
Turkish-8
Arab-8
Cyrillic
PC858 MtLi
MCText
Roman-9
Latin 9
Win 3.0 Latin-1
Japan Postnet
Katakana Post
ASCII
Math Symb
ISO Spain
ISO Italian
ISO Portugu
Latin-1
Latin-2
Latin-5
Table 7. Available Symbol Sets
Code
0H
0K
1K
1L
0O
1O
0S
0B/0L
0D
0E
1E
0F
0G
4U
9N
9U n/a
8U
8T
8V
8R
13U
12J n/a
0U
0A/0M
1S
0I
4S
0N
2N
5N
Density (Pitches)
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS(5,10) DP NLQ
HS(5,10) DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ n/a n/a
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
DP
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
DP(5,10) NLQ(5,10)
DP
OCRA(10)
OCRB(10)
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
48
Character Density Selection
Table 7. Available Symbol Sets (continued)
Name
Latin-6
Baltic
PC-8 DanNor
PC-8 Cd 437
PC-850 MtLi
PC-851 LtGk
PC-852 Latin2
PC Turkish
PC Hebrew
PC Lat/Ara
PC Cyrillic
Win3.1 Lat1
Win3.1 Lat-2
Win3.1 Lat-5
Math-8
PS Math
Greek 7
Postnet 4
Postnet 11.3
Greek-8
Hebrew-8
Katakana-8
DEC 256 Greek
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
5T
8M
5M
12N
9T
15H
10V
3R
19U
9E
15Y
1K
8G
6N
19L
11U
10U
12U
12G
17U n/a n/a n/a n/a
8H
8K n/a n/a n/a n/a
Code Density (Pitches)
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS(5,10) DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
DP NLQ
DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
NLQ(4)
NLQ(11.25)
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
DP(5,10) NLQ(5,10)
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
HS DP NLQ
Note All fonts support the following pitches unless otherwise noted: (5, 10, 12, 13.3, 15, 16.67, 20).
49
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Character Font Selection
The printer can print several different character sets (fonts). By performing a printer self-test, you can see which fonts are installed in your printer. You may specify any of these fonts from an application. On the self-test printout, each available character font is printed along with a parameter number to the left of the printed font.
Note Many earlier models of HP printers could not select certain combinations of character sets. Your new LineJet printer does not have this limitation. The new LineJet printer produces different characters than the previous models, and your application may be requesting the old character set.
You will need to modify your application's settings to prevent it from selecting the old character set.
There are two ways to select a font from those available:
• By entering the parameter number via the control panel (function 1 = primary character set; function 2 = secondary character set)
• By specifying the attributes of the desired fonts using escape sequences.
The list below contains the font attributes, listed in order of descending priority:
• Symbol Set (ASCII, Roman-8, Line Draw, etc.)
• Pitch (10,12,13.3,15,16.67, 20)
• Style (Upright/Italic)
• Density (High-Speed, Near Letter Quality)
The attributes are specified for both primary and secondary fonts so that you may switch between the primary and secondary fonts using the Shift Out (SO) and Shift In (SI) control codes. Notice that the only difference between the primary and secondary font escape sequences is the direction of the parentheses. The left parenthesis “(“ is used for primary fonts and the right parenthesis “)” for secondary. Upon receiving these font attribute commands, the printer selects the best fitting font from those available.
It is not necessary to specify all four font attributes when selecting a font. If any of the attributes are not specified, the printer defaults to those attributes last specified (or, if none have been specified, from the control panel default font). For example, if you wish to select a font without selecting a print pitch, the print pitch last specified will be in effect. If you had not previously specified a print pitch, the printer will use the print pitch of the default font that was last specified from the control panel (provided that the particular symbol set selected is available in the current pitch).
The escape sequences used for specifying the character font attributes are explained in the following paragraphs.
50
Character Font Selection
Symbol Set Selection
The printer allows you to select a symbol set. A symbol set is a set of characters that are mapped to certain locations in the printer’s memory.
Symbol sets differ from one another in the characters contained in the set and in their locations within memory. The default symbol set is that of the default font specified from the control panel.
The following escape sequences are used to specify the primary and secondary symbol sets:
ESC( ID Select symbol set for primary character font
ESC) ID Select symbol set for secondary character font
Table 8 lists the ID’s needed to select each symbol set. For example, to select the Roman-8 symbol set for the primary font, you would send the ESC(8U escape sequence. To select OCR-B for the secondary font, you would send
ESC)1O to the printer.
An ASCII symbol set table is provided in Appendix A.
Note Any number of fonts may be printed on each line, but to do this, each font must be the same pitch and typeface. That is, only one print pitch, or typeface is allowed per line.
Symbol Set
Name
Roman-8*
Turkish-8
Arab-8
Cyrillic-8
ASCII
Math Symbol
Line Draw Set
ISO Den/Nor
Roman Ext Char
ISO UK
ISO France
ISO German
Hebrew
Japan ASCII
Katakana
0H
0K
1K
0E
1E
0F
0G
8U
8T
8V
8R
0U
0A or 0M
0B or 0L
0D
ID
7-Bit
7-Bit
7-Bit
7-Bit
8-Bit
7-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
7-Bit
7-Bit
7-Bit
7-Bit
Table 8. Symbol Set Selection
Classification
Printable in hex
80-9F Range
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Mode
51
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Symbol Set
Name
PC-852 Lat2
PC Turkish
PC Hebrew
PC Lat/Ara
PC Cyrillic
Win 3.1 Latin-1
Win 3.1 Latin-2
Win 3.1 Latin-5
Math-8
PS Math
Greek-7
Postnet 4
Postnet 11.25
Greek-8
Hebrew-8
Katakana-8
Block Char
OCR-A
1L
0O
OCR-B 1O
ISO Swe/Fin 0S
ISO Spain
ISO Italian
ISO Portugu
Latin-1
1S
0I
4S
0N
Latin-2
Latin-5
Latin-6
Baltic
PC-8 DanNor
PC-8 Code 437
PC-850 MtLi
PC-851 Lt/Gk
11U
10U
12U
12G
2N
5N
6N
19L
1K
8G
8H
8K
8M
5M
12N
15Y / 0K
3R
19U
9E
5T
17U
9T
15H
10V
ID
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
7-Bit
7-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
8-Bit
7-Bit
7-Bit
7-Bit
7-Bit
7-Bit
7-Bit
7-Bit
8-Bit
Table 8. Symbol Set Selection (continued)
Classification
Printable in hex
80-9F Range
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Mode
52
Character Overstrike
Symbol Set
Name
DEC 256 Greek
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Table 8. Symbol Set Selection (continued)
ID Classification n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Printable in hex
80-9F Range n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Mode
Character Overstrike
To create special symbols and underline selected portions of your output, one character (maximum) may be printed over another on a character-bycharacter or line-by-line basis.
A character overstrike is accomplished using either the backspace control code or a carriage return with no line feed. The overstrike print line will be held in the print buffer and will be merged with the next line to form a single printed line with superimposed characters.
Attempting to print more than two characters in any one print location will result in a loss of data integrity. (Only the last two characters received will be retained.)
When the automatic underlining enhancement is used (ESC&dD), the underlined character is not considered an overstrike character. Therefore, if the underlining enhancement was used to underline a character, another character could still be printed over it without risking data loss.
Character Style Selection
The printer has two types of character styles: upright and italic. The following escape sequences select either the upright or the italic print style for the primary and secondary character fonts:
ESC(s0S Selects the upright style for the primary font
ESC(s1S Selects the italic style for the primary font
ESC)s0S Selects the upright style for the secondary font
ESC)s1S Selects the italic style for the secondary font
Italics cannot be selected or saved from the control panel. The printer will default to the upright style when the printer is first powered on. Changing emulations, loading a configuration, or sending the ESCE command to the printer will cancel the italic style for the primary and secondary fonts.
53
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Cursor Control
Absolute and relative cursor control are provided for the printer. Cursor moves are made in the current active pitch and current active vertical spacing. The following escape sequences perform these functions:
Absolute Row ESC&a#R
Move cursor to absolute row # (where # is an unsigned integer)
Absolute Column
Relative Row
ESC&a#C
Move cursor to absolute column # (where # is an unsigned integer)
ESC&a[+#]R
Move cursor to relative row # from current position
(where # is a signed [+ only] integer)
Relative Column ESC&a[+/-#]C
Move cursor to relative column # from current position
(where # is a signed [+/-] integer)
Note A plus (+) or minus (-) sign in front of the value indicates that the new position is relative to the current active position. A
(+) sign means the new position is to the right (horizontal) or that paper motion is forward (vertical). A (-) sign means that the new cursor position is to the left of the current active position. The printer does not perform reverse paper motion.
The vertical cursor positioning commands move the current active position to the same column on a new line; the vertical movement is based on the active vertical spacing.
The horizontal cursor positioning commands move the current active position to a new column on the same line; the horizontal movement is based on the active horizontal print pitch.
The first column/row within a line/page is column/row zero. Therefore, the upper left-most position is position (0,0). This escape sequence ignores margins and can therefore be used to set the current active position to any location within the printer’s physical limits. If a request is made for a location outside the printer’s physical limits, the current active position is moved to the appropriate limit.
54
Display Functions Mode
Display Functions Mode
(PCL Level I)
The display functions mode can be entered using the ESCY sequence. In the display functions mode, the printer prints representative character symbols for the control code characters instead of actually executing the control characters. In this mode, the carriage return (CR) control character will cause a CR symbol to be printed and an actual carriage return and line feed to be performed. The display functions mode can be exited by sending an ESCZ sequence. The ESCZ will be printed before the mode is terminated. Display
Functions Mode “off” is the printer default state.
Note The system driver may only allow the printer to print one line in the display functions mode.
When the printer is printing in high-speed draft mode, display function characters will not be printed.
Horizontal Margin Selection
Absolute left and right margin selection is accomplished using the following escape sequences:
ESC&a[ print position ]L Set left margin
ESC&a[ print position ]M Set right margin
The print position specified indicates a decimal number in the range 0 through
131 @ 10cpi (0 - 65 for Double-size, 5 cpi, 0-219 for compressed, 16.67 cpi).
The print position represents the column using the print pitch active when the margin is set. For example, if the character pitch is 10 characters/inch and the left margin is set to column 20, the left margin will be two inches from the left physical limit of the printer. If the pitch is then changed to 5 characters/inch, the left margin would still be in the same logical position, but column 20 would be four inches from the left physical limit of the printer instead of 2 inches.
Margins can be set at any column, regardless of the present printing position.
If the new margin selected is to the right of the current print position, then the new setting takes effect immediately. If the new margin setting is to the left of the current print position, then the new setting does not take effect until the cursor is reset to zero.
The first column within a line is designated column 0. If a print position greater
(or less) than the printer's physical limit is specified, the right (or left) margin will be set to the limits of the printer. Power-on and set the margins to the maximum limits.
Commands are ignored if the result would place the left margin to the right of the right margin. The only way to move the current active position outside the margins is by using the escape sequences for horizontal cursor control.
55
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
To release the right margin use one of the following escape sequences:
ESC&a132M for 10 cpi
ESC&a158M for 12 cpi
ESC&a175M for 13.3 cpi
ESC&a198M for 15 cpi
ESC&a220M for 16.7 cpi
The ESC9 command resets the left and right margins. The left margin is set to the left edge of the logical page (column 0) and the right margin is set to the right edge of the logical page.
Line Spacing
Vertical line spacing of 6 or 8 LPI (lines per inch) can be selected either from the control panel or remotely using the ESC&l[6 or 8]D sequence. When the printer is reset, the vertical line spacing is as set from the control panel. If a parameter other than 6 or 8 is entered, the command is ignored and no line spacing change is made.
Note Changing the line spacing causes the standard VFC table to be recalculated.
Logical Page Length Selection
(PCL Level II)
Two page length definitions exist for the printer; physical page length and logical page length. The physical page length is the length of the paper in inches. The printer also allows you to set page length in lines per page.
The logical page length is that which is received via an escape sequence and is calculated in lines per page. Therefore, one physical page can contain more than one logical page.
The default logical page length is the physical page length. In most cases, formatting problems can be solved by changing the physical page length and using the default logical page length.
Note When loading a different size of form in the printer, it is usually best to have the operator set the physical page (from the control panel) to the actual size of the paper rather than programmatically setting the logical page to match the length of the new form (and leaving the physical page length at its previous value). This practice avoids problems if a paper-out occurs.
56
Perforation Skip Mode
The logical page length is set using the ESC&l[1-128]P sequence, where the value field (1-128) is the desired number of lines per page. This command also defaults the text length to be one inch less than the logical page length, unless the logical page length is one inch or less, in which case the text length is set equal to the page length. Requests for a page length of zero cause the logical page length to equal the physical page length. Requests for a page length greater than 128 are ignored.
Although the logical page is specified in number of lines, this number represents the space occupied by that many lines (using the line spacing that was effective at the time the logical page length was specified). Therefore, if a logical page length of 66 lines is specified and the line spacing is currently at 6
LPI, the logical page length is 11 inches. If the line spacing is changed (to 8
LPI) in the middle of the page, the actual length of the page would still be 11 inches but the number of print lines would be 88 (8 LPI x 11 inches).
Before changing the page length, it is recommended that a VFC select of channel 0 be performed. This will bring the printer to the top of the next physical page (unless the printer is already at the top of the physical page).
Changing the logical page length changes the standard VFC table.
Perforation Skip Mode
(PCL Level I)
When perforation skip is enabled, the printer skips to the next Top of Form if the bottom margin is entered following a line feed. The following escape sequences enable and disable the perforation skip mode:
ESC&l1L
ESC&l0L
Enable perforation skip mode
Disable perforation skip mode
If a programmable VFC is enabled, the end of text is determined by the first occurrence of channel 2. If channel 2 is completely clear, the end of text is the end of the page (that is, there is no perforation region). The text length defaults to one inch less than the logical page length unless the text length has been specified with the ESC&l[1-128]F sequence.
Perforation skip mode defaults as configured from the control panel.
When the perforation skip mode is disabled, the printer will print in the margin space below the desired bottom of text. This can be avoided if a VFC select to the next Top of Form is performed immediately following the last desired line of text on the page.
Note Many systems perform an automatic page eject which overrides the printer’s perforation skip mode. If the user desires to print in the perforation skip region, the system’s automatic page eject must be disabled.
57
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
0
2
4
8**
Print Mode Selection
The standard, compressed, and double-high/double-wide print modes are selected using the ESC&l[0,2,4,8]S sequence as shown in the following table.
This escape sequence affects both the primary and secondary character fonts. The default print mode is that of the default font specified from the control panel. Only one print mode is allowed per line.
Table 9. Print Mode Selection
Mode
Horizontal Pitch
(in characters/inch)
10.0
16.67
12.0
5.0
6 or 8
6 or 8
6 or 8
3 or 4
Vertical Pitch
(in lines/inch)*
* Dependent on current line spacing.
** Double high/double wide character set selection.
Print Pitch Selection
Print pitch is specified using the following escape sequences:
ESC(s[5,10,12,13.3,15,16.7,20.0]H
Select print pitch for primary character font
ESC)s[5,10,12,13.3,15,16.7,20.0]H
Select print pitch for secondary character font
When specifying a pitch, if no font with the exact size specified is available, the next larger pitch will be designated. If a larger pitch does not exist, the pitch will be set to 16.67. Only one pitch per line may be selected. The default print pitch is that of the primary font specified from the control panel.
Note Refer to the LineJet Printers: User’s Guide to see which pitches are available for different symbol set and typeface combinations.
Printing in the Hex 80 through Hex FF Region
The LineJet printer exhibits different behaviors as it processes characters in the hex 80 through FF range. Behavior is based upon the symbol set of the active font. If the symbol set of the active font is 7-bit, characters in the hex 80 through FF range will be ignored. If the symbol set is 8-bit, the printer will attempt to process the characters.
There are two different types of 8-bit sets. Some have characters that are printable in the hex 80 through 9F region, while others do not. (See Table 8).
58
PTX Linefeed
If the active symbol set does not have printables in the hex 80 through 9F range, the characters are ignored.
To determine symbol set properties, perform a symbol set print from the PCL menu. 7-bit sets print only one line of characters, while 8-bit sets print two. 8bit sets, with printables in the hex 80 through 9F range, print characters in the space below the control code on the first line. Those without printables in that range leave the area under the control codes blank.
PTX Linefeed
Determines the vertical text alignment when a Linefeed command is sent.
ESC*t1L Enabled
ESC*t0L Disabled
When PTX Linefeed is enabled, the Linefeed moves to the next line as calculated from the Top of Form position, thereby retaining vertical text alignment. When printing graphics or bar codes, you may want to set the PTX
Linefeed parameter to Enable to maintain text alignment.
When PTX Linefeed is disabled, the Linefeed is to be performed as calculated from the bottom of the graphics or barcode, thereby disrupting the vertical text alignment.
See Figure 1 for an example of this parameter enabled and disabled.
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
PTX Linefeed Enabled
Linefeed
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
PTX Linefeed Disabled
Linefeed
Figure 1. PTX Linefeed
59
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Programmable Reset
The programmable reset escape sequence (ESCE) causes the printer to eject paper to the top-of-form (position 0,0) if not already at top-of-form. This command resets all current printer configuration values to the following states. The printer remains on-line after a programmable reset. When the printer is reset, it is set to a known state as follows:
• Primary and secondary character sets (fonts) as configured from the control panel.
• Vertical line spacing (6/8 LPI) as configured from the control panel.
• Paper moves to the next Top of Form position (if not currently at Top of
Form).
• Data buffer is printed and then the buffer is cleared.
• Standard VFC channel assignments selected as defined by physical page length.
• Margins set at maximum limits and/or Left margin set at first column (0).
• Physical page length remains as configured from the control panel.
• Logical page length = physical page length
• Text length = logical page length minus one inch
• All character font attributes (symbol set, pitch, style, and density) default to the character font configured from the control panel.
• Display functions off and Underline enhance disabled.
• Perforation skip mode as configured from the control panel.
• Enable/Disable Label Card as configured from control panel.
• Printronix linefeed emulation as configured from control panel.
• Raster graphics horizontal resolution as configured from the control panel. Vertical resolution set to 72 dots per inch.
Programmable VFC
Programmable VFC allows the user to specify paper movement information other than the standard VFC definitions shown in Table 12. VFC information is stored in the memory (RAM) table just as the standard VFC is, only the bytes of information are loaded into RAM using the following escape sequence:
ESC&l[ byte count ]W[ VFC data ]
The byte count parameter specifies the number (in decimal 0 - 255) of VFC data bytes to expect immediately following the termination of the escape sequence.
Note An even byte count must be indicated. If an odd byte count is indicated, the VFC table in RAM will not be overwritten and the data bytes following the ESC sequence are read and discarded.
60
Programmable VFC
VFC data is the binary data which is loaded into the VFC table in RAM. These
8-bit bytes are sent in the following order following the ESC sequence terminator: the most significant byte of the first word followed by the least significant byte of the first word, followed by the most significant byte of the second word, etc. The most significant bit of each word is channel 16 and the least significant bit of each word is channel 1.
VFC Data = (MS byte) (LS byte) (MS byte) (LS byte) . . .
(word 1 = line 1) (word 2 = line 2) . . .
Once the VFC has been loaded into the RAM table, the VFC channels are selected using the ESC&l[0 through 16]V sequence in the same manner as the standard VFC. The standard and programmable VFC both use the same table in RAM. Resetting the printer causes the standard VFC to be recalculated using the current page and text (form) length and a new table to be overwritten in RAM. The VFC table is also recalculated when the line spacing, text length, or page length changes.
Note If the I/O is configured for 7 bit data, channels 8 and 16 cannot be downloaded with confidence since the eighth bit is used for the communication protocol. Selecting channels 8 or 16 for 7 bit data is not recommended.
Special VFC Considerations
Before loading a VFC table, it is recommended that a VFC select of channel 0 be performed. This will bring the printer to the top of the physical page.
When a programmed VFC is loaded into RAM, the logical page length is automatically calculated using the following formula:
Logical Page Length (in number of lines) = byte count /2
The example on page 67 shows a VFC table which uses “standard” VFC definitions and also illustrates a programmable VFC.
Example: Defining a 3.5 inch form at six lines per inch.
1 inch = 6 lines x 3.5 inches = 21 lines
61
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Programmable VFC Using PCL
Programmable VFC’s using PCL seem to cause a lot of problems and misunderstandings. Most of the misunderstanding concerns the use of the escape sequence used to set the VFC file. This escape sequence is used to override the default VFC of the printer. This escape sequence can be hardcoded into a program or ASCII file.
VFC’s are best understood by reviewing an actual example of how to implement them. For this discussion, the example consists of a 3.5 inch form at six lines per inch with several different channels defined for use on the form to be printed.
1 inch = 6 lines per inch x 3.5 inches = 21 lines; therefore this would be a 21 line form.
Note The TEXT LENGTH command could be used in conjunction with the standard VFC and accomplish the above requirements. The assumption is there are reasons to use a customized VFC; this example has been simplified for clarification purposes.
First, establish the VFC length: with a 3.5” form and 6 LPI print, we have 21 potential lines of print (3.5 x 6 = 21). Refer to the following figure for an example of the desired finished output.
There are many methods to accomplish this task. The simplest way is to provide a “1” in CH3 (Channel 3) for all possible print lines and simply call
CH3 for each line (including blank lines). This is called “line counting” and leaves the burden of positioning with the programmer (adding or deleting a line causes an adjustment elsewhere to be made).
EXAMPLE FORM
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
Line 6
Line 7
Line 8
Line 9
Line 10
Line 11
Line 12
Line 13
Line 14
Line 15
Line 16
Line 17
Line 18
Line 19
Line 20
Line 21
Company name
Street address
Opening line
Body
Body
Body
Closing line
P.S. line
62
Programmable VFC
A second method involves only providing a “1” in CH3 where print will occur.
The programmer then simply calls CH3 and the blank lines are skipped.
There still is no flexibility for adding or deleting lines without VFC modification, but line counting is minimized.
A third method involves assigning VFC channels to each section of the letter and performing a call to CH3 within each section. To do this, the manufacturer highly recommends following these guidelines:
• CH1 should always define TOF and must be present for a valid load.
• CH2 should always define BOF allowing for vertical margin (if any) and must be present for valid paper out conditions.
• CH3 should be present for any potential print line except in the vertical margin area (if any).
For this example, CH1 will occur at line 1 and is aligned with the Company
Name. We will arbitrarily assign CH4 to occur at line 7 (Opening Line), CH5 to occur at line 10 (Body), CH6 to occur on line 17 (Closing Line) and CH7 to occur on line 20 (P.S. Line).
With the above channel assignments in mind, the programmer would call CH1 to begin the letter. After printing the name and address (using calls to CH3 to
“move” to each line) the programmer would call CH4 to skip to line 7 and print the opening line. Next, a call is made to CH5 to skip to line 10 and print the body, CH6 to print the closing and CH7 to print the P.S. line. This gives each section flexibility by allowing variable sizes, limited by the physical room available before interfering with the next section and avoiding the drudgery of line count.
The above VFC would look like:
Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
Line 6
Line 7
Line 8
Line 9
Line 10
Line 11
Line 12
Line 13
Line 14
Line 15
Line 16
Line 17
Line 18
Line 19
Line 20
Line 21
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note A “1” corresponds to a hole punched in a physical paper tape.
63
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Notice that for each line channel 3 is selected, this would select a single space advance. A 1 could be placed in any or all other channels and the VFC would still be valid since the printer will only look at the channel selected and advance to the next line that contained a 1 in that channel. For example, if the printer was on line 2 and channel 7 was selected, the printer would advance or slew down to line 20 which is the first line where there is a “1” in channel 7.
The next step would be to convert the above VFC definition into the escape sequence format. The VFC data portion of the escape sequence reverses the order of the channels. Once reversed, the 16 bits are then divided into two, 8bit bytes, with channel 16 being the Most Significant Bit (MSB) of the word and channel 1 the Least Significant Bit (LSB) of the word. Refer to Table 10.
Since the escape sequence requires the VFC data to be in ASCII format this binary data must be converted to ASCII. As in our example, many characters may convert to “unprintable” ASCII characters (below ASCII OCTAL 037).
Refer to the ASCII Symbol Set chart in Appendix A. Entering unprintable data can be done in several ways:
The easiest and preferred method involves using “dummy” VFC channels to cause the converted character to become a printable one. For example, always have bit 7 and bit 15 a “1”, thus adding %100 to the unprintable character, and eliminating the confusion of entering unprintable data. Do not
“call” the corresponding channel bit 7 or 15 or else improper spacing will occur.
If the VFC channels that bits 7 and 15 represent must be used, these unprintable characters must be manipulated for data entry. In most cases, this can be dealt with by using the DISPLAY FUNCTIONS mode of your terminal.
Type in the “ESC&l[ byte count ]W” followed by the ASCII characters using the
CONTROL key with the corresponding letter. (Since the CONTROL key subtracts %100 (100 OCTAL) simply add %100 to the “unprintable” character.
For example, 00000101 converts to %5, adding %100 gives you a %105 which is an E, therefore, pressing a CONTROL E gives the desired result.)
If your terminal doesn't have a DISPLAY FUNCTIONS mode, some EDITOR programs allow entering the OCTAL equivalents. Some editors do not allow the user to directly enter OCTAL numbers. In this case, a “dummy” character would be entered as the VFC data. Next, the EDITOR “CHANGE” command would be used to change the dummy character to the desired ASCII character. For example, place an “x” as a dummy character in the VFC data and use the CHANGE command to replace the “x” with an ASCII 01 (SOH character) by typing “CHANGEQ “x” to ‘01”. This would replace the “x” with the unprintable ASCII 01; your escape sequence would appear one character shorter without DISPLAY FUNCTIONS mode turned on.
This could also be accomplished by changing the specific column to the
ASCII character required. It is important to specify the starting and stopping column or the CHANGE command will act as a column INSERT. For example, if column 10 on line 2 is to be changed to an ASCII 04 you would type “CHANGEQ 10/10 TO '04 IN 2”.
Note The “ ' ” is the single quote and not the prime character.
64
Programmable VFC
The HP 3000 Workstation Configurator allows entering the VFC data in an initialization string. This is only applicable when using a printer with a serial interface and has some limitations. The most significant limitation is that the initialization string can contain only 120 formatted (compiled) characters. This limits use to VFCs of 57 lines or less (6 escape sequence characters + 114
VFC data characters = 120). Any other commands in the initialization string reduces this further. Space available in the initialization string data entry field
(three lines) is NOT an accurate indicator of the number of formatted characters; careful counting is necessary. Using VFC channels 8 and 16 is also not allowed due to a limitation of entering data with an octal value above
177.
There are several methods to enter data in the Workstation Configurator:
• Entering data as a decimal number, i.e. 13 for a carriage return.
• As an OCTAL number (one byte at a time) by preceding the number with the % sign.
• As a two or three character mnemonic such as BS or DC1 (see Appendix
B of the Workstation Configuration manual).
• By entering the control characters with the up-arrow or circumflex character preceding the character, i.e. a backspace would be an ^H.
• By entering the actual ASCII character within single quotes, i.e. ’A’ would equate to an OCTAL %101.
Each character entered, with the exception of multiple ASCII characters within the single quote, MUST BE separated by commas. An example would be
“ESC, '&16W', %101, 'ABC', BS, 13”.
Note Only one byte may be specified at a time in OCTAL, thus allowing a maximum of OCTAL 377 which would place a 1 in columns 1-8.
65
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
Line 6
Line 7
Line 8
Table 10. Converting VFC Format to VFC Data
Most Significant Byte Least Significant Byte
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Octal
MSB/LSB
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 %000%005
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 %000%004
ASCII
MSB/LSB
NulEnq
NulEot
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 %000%004 NulEot
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004
NulEot
NulEot
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 %000%014 NulFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot
Line 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot
Line 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 %000%024 NulDc4
Line 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot
Line 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot
Line 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot
Line 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot
Line 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot
Line 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot
Line 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 %000%044 Nul$
Line 18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot
Line 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%004 NulEot
Line 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 %000%104 NulD
Line 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 %000%006 NulAck
@D
@D
@$*
@D
@D
@D*
@F
@D
@D
@D
@D
@L
@D
@D
@T
@D
@D
@D
@D
CTL
MSB/LSB
@E
@D
* DO NOT depress the Control Key on these BOLDFACE characters since they are printable characters.
This VFC data can now be entered into the escape sequence in an ASCII file or programmatically and be either embedded into the application or merged with the spool file.
66
Programmable VFC
Example VFC Data Entry Methods
The example escape sequence may be created while the DISPLAY
FUNCTIONS key has been enabled as shown below.*
Top of Form
Bottom of Form
Single Spacing
Double Spacing**
Triple Spacing**
Half Form
Quarter Form
Tenth Line
Bottom of Form
Bottom of Form - 1
Top of Form - 1
Top of Form
Seventh Line
Sixth Line
Fifth Line
Fourth Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
Line 6
Line 7
Line 8
Line 9
Line 10
Line 11
Line 12
Line 13
Line 14
Line 15
Line 16
Line 17
Line 18
Line 19
Line 20
Line 21
Channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1 1 1
1
1 1
1
1 1
1
1
1 1 1
1
1 1 1
1 1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*This sample shows a 21-line VFC table at 6 LPI. The text ends at line 14, leaving 6 blank lines (one inch) at the bottom of the page.
**These channels cause a move to the next double/triple space line.
Press the CONTROL key before each letter of the VFC data except for the two BOLDFACE characters.
ESC&142W@E@D@D@D@D@D@L@D@D@T@D@D@D@D@D@
$@D@D@D@F
VFC data
This would display the corresponding ASCII character, i.e., the Nul for CTL
@.
67
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Another method using a text editor would be to do a CHANGE command replacement to convert the characters to ASCII characters. This is shown as:
\ADD 1
1 ESC&142WabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJ
2 //
\CHANGEQ 7/7 TO ’00
.
.
\CHANGEQ 8/8 TO ’05
\CHANGEQ 9/9 TO ’00
.
\CHANGEQ 48/48 TO ’06
This could also be input by not entering the letters, but simply changing the specific column to the desired ASCII character. In the above example the
“abc... HIJ” would not be entered and the CHANGE command would be used as follows:
.
.
.
\CHANGEQ 7 TO '00 \CHANGEQ 8 TO '05
An example for the Workstation Configurator might be input in several formats. An example showing the various formats is shown below:
ESC, '&142W' ,NUL,ENQ, '@, 'D, 00, 04, %0, %4, ....%0, %6
As you can see, the escape sequence for the Programmable VFC can be quite complicated. This should only be used after attempting to satisfy VFC requirements using the standard (computed) VFC and the TEXT and PAGE
LENGTH escape sequences.
The most common errors in successfully implementing the Programmable
VFC escape sequence usually involve improper VFC byte counting or attempting to manipulate “unprintable” characters and getting confused.
Converting these “unprintable” characters to printable ones is the easiest way to avoid data entry confusion.
Summary of Recommended Steps to Implement Programmable VFC
1.
Layout the required VFC in a standard channel 1-16 format.
2.
Reverse the resulting bit image so that channel 1 is now where channel
16 was and channel 16 is now where channel 1 was.
3.
Divide this 16 bit image into two 8-bit bytes.
4.
Decode these 8-bit bytes into ASCII characters using the chart in
Appendix A. If the corresponding decoded character is not a printable character (below %37), it is highly suggested to convert to one by using a
“dummy” channel (7 and/or 15).
5.
Enter these characters into the Programmable VFC escape sequence as the VFC data. This data MUST be an even byte count and is CASE
SENSITIVE (upper/lower). As in all escape sequences, do not include the brackets ([ ]); they are for clarification only.
68
Raster Graphics
6.
This escape sequence must be sent to the printer before the data by embedding in the application or as part of an initialization string. A programmable or hardware RESET will clear the VFC RAM causing the printer to return to the default VFC.
Note If either the RS-232E or the RS-422B interface is installed in the printer, the interface can be configured to have such things as STRIP NULLS AND DELETES. The Null and/or
Delete character could be used as valid characters, so the user must either combine other channels on the same line to generate another character, or not configure the printer to strip these characters. Another factor may be the use of 8-bit data. If the user desires to use channels 8 and 16, then 8-bit data must be configured. For more detail please refer to the
LineJet Printers: User’s Guide manual.
Raster Graphics
Graphics are sent to the printer using the following escape sequences:
ESC*t[70, 140]R Raster graphics resolution
ESC*r#L Horizontal raster graphics resolution
ESC*r#V Vertical raster graphics resolution
The ESC*r#L and ESC*r#V escape sequences allow you to set the horizontal and vertical raster graphics resolutions independently. Valid raster graphics resolutions are 70 DPI by 72 DPI, 140 DPI by 72 DPI, 70 DPI by 144 DPI, and
140 DPI by 144 DPI. The following table lists the graphics resolution and the corresponding escape sequence used to select that graphics resolution.
There are many different valid ways to select a given graphics resolution. The following table lists only one of the many valid ways.
The ESC*t#R escape sequence allows you to select a graphics resolution of either 70 x 72 dots per inch (default) or 140 x 144 dots per inch (high resolution). For example, to specify high-resolution, you would send the
ESC*t140R escape sequence to the printer. Using the standard resolution, the maximum amount of graphics data that can be printed is 115.5 bytes versus 231 bytes for high-resolution.
Table 11. Graphics Resolution
Horizontal DPI
70
140
70
140
72
Vertical DPI
72
144
144
Escape Sequence
ESC*r70l72V
ESC*r140l72V
ESC*r70l144V
ESC*r140l144V
ESC*rA Prepare for raster graphics (PCL Level I)
ESC*b[ # of bytes ] W[ binary data ] Raster data transfer (PCL Level I)
ESC*b[
ESC*rB
# of raster lines ]Y Move paper # number of raster lines
Raster graphics complete (PCL Level I)
69
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
The ESC*rA sequence informs the printer that a raster graphics dump is to follow the sequence. If the printer has received a partial line of ASCII data before this sequence is received, this escape sequence causes the ASCII data to be printed and a carriage return and line feed to be performed.
The ESC*b#W[ binary data ] sequence actually sends the raster data to the printer. This escape sequence must be sent for each raster line to be printed.
The # of bytes parameter is the decimal number of bytes of binary graphics data to be sent to the printer. The binary data consists of a 1 for every dot to be printed and a 0 for every blank space.
The ESC*b#Y escape sequence allows you to skip multiple adjacent blank lines. The # of raster lines parameter is the decimal number of blank raster lines to skip. The size of the blank raster line to be skipped is equivalent to the currently set vertical raster graphics resolution. The advantage of using this escape sequence over sending multiple raster data transfer escape sequences containing blank raster lines is the escape sequence is processed faster and the paper is moved faster.
The ESC*rB sequence informs the printer that all the raster data has been transferred.
The following example illustrates how to send three lines of raster graphics to the printer.
ESC*rAESC*b2WDc
ESC*rA Prepares printer for raster graphics
ESC*b2W Indicates two bytes of data to follow
D c
First byte of graphics data
Second byte of graphics data
ESC*b2WL@
ESC*b2W Indicates two bytes of data to follow
L First byte of graphics data
@ Second byte of graphics data
ESC*b2W$+ESC*rB
ESC*b2W Indicates two bytes of data to follow
$ First byte of graphics data
+
ESC*rB
Second byte of graphics data
Raster graphics complete
Many systems perform an automatic line feed after each line of data. The system’s automatic line feed must be suppressed or else the raster lines will not be adjacent to each other. A file equation which specifies the line length
(for example, RESC=-219) may be used to suppress the automatic line feed along with carriage control directives, such as “+”.
Graphics files must be raster graphics files in the format described here in order to print on the printer. To print vector graphics files, such as graphics files created for plotters, a vector-to-raster conversion must be performed on the data. (Vector-to-raster conversion is NOT a standard feature of the printer.) Text and graphics cannot mix on the same line due to grid conflicts.
Raster graphics use 8-bit data.
70
Self-test
Self-test
(PCL Level I)
ESCz prints the PCL-II configuration report, which shows available character sets, symbol sets, bar codes, etc.
Standard (Computed) VFC
The printer VFC uses the logical page and form length (text length) to calculate the distance to be skipped for each VFC channel. This information is then loaded into the printer's VFC “table.” The “table” is 16 channels wide and n lines long, where n is the logical page length in number of lines. A VFC channel contains a 1 in this table on every line it can access. If the VFC channel cannot access the line, a 0 is placed on that line for that channel. For example, to specify a skip to the next half form, a program would specify VFC channel 6. Notice in the sample on page 67 that 1's are placed in the table at the half form position (lines 1 and 9). Then, for example, if the printer has finished printing line 2 and channel 6 is selected, the paper will be advanced to line 9.
To use the standard VFC, perform the ESC&l[0-16]V sequence using the appropriate parameter number listed in Table 12.
Stroke Weight (Bold)
The Stroke Weight command designates the thickness of the strokes that compose the characters of a font.
ESC(s#B Primary stroke weight
ESC)s#B Secondary stroke weight
The value field (#) must be 0 for standard stroke weight, or 3 for bold stroke weight.
Switching Character Fonts
Character fonts can be accessed using the Shift In/Shift Out (SI/SO) control codes.
The SO (CTRL N) control code is sent to the printer to access the secondary font; the SI (CTRL O) control code is sent to select the primary font.
71
Chapter 2 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
Text Length (Vertical Margin) Selection
(PCL Level II)
The length of a form within a logical page is set using the ESC&l[1-128]F sequence, where the number of lines desired (1-128) is specified. The first line of text is printed at the Top of Form position. The physical page length minus the text length defines the total vertical margin (top plus bottom margin) for the page.
If a text length of zero is received, the text length defaults to one inch less than the logical page length. The default text length, which is invoked any time the logical page length is changed, is one inch less than the logical page length. If the logical page length is one inch or less, the text length is set equal to the logical page length.
Transparent Print Data
This feature allows the printing of binary data which is required in certain applications. The escape sequence ESC&p[ # of bytes ]X enables the printer to print data as in the display functions mode, except that no control codes or escape sequences (including CR and ESCZ) are executed. The number specified in the value field is the exact number of bytes that will be interpreted as binary.
Underline Mode
The ESC&dD sequence enables the automatic underlining mode. In this mode, each printed character and space is underlined until the printer receives an ESC&d@ sequence. The underline enhancement is disabled in the default state. Underlining only affects forward horizontal movement such as SP (space), DATA, or forward horizontal cursor moves; reverse movements such as BS (backspace), CR (carriage return) and negative horizontal cursor moves are not affected.
72
Vertical Forms Control (VFC)
Vertical Forms Control (VFC)
Vertical forms control (VFC) is a feature which allows increased throughput by enabling the printer to skip to predetermined print locations. Key page locations, such as top of form, half form, double space, and triple space, are referred to as channels (0 through 16) and are stored in a VFC “table.”
The printer has both a standard (computed) VFC and a programmable VFC.
Note In most situations, the printer's standard (computed) VFC page length setting, as determined from the front panel, meets the application requirements. Refer to the LineJet
Printers: User’s Guide for information on setting the page length from the front panel.
Prefix
ESC&l
Table 12. VFC Default Channel Definitions
12
13
14
15
16
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Parameter Terminator v/V
Explanation
*Conditional Top of Physical Page
Top of Form (first line of text)
Bottom of Form (last line of text)
Single spacing
**Double spacing
**Triple spacing
Half form
Quarter form
Tenth line
Bottom of Form
Bottom of Form - 1
Top of Form - 1
Top of Form
Seventh line
Sixth line
Fifth line
Fourth line
*All escape sequences except ESC&l0V refer to the logical page rather than the physical page. This escape sequence causes a skip to the top of the next physical page (unless already at top of page).
**These channels cause a move to the next double/triple space line, and therefore may not actually perform a double/triple space.
73
Chapter 2 HP 3000 Information
HP 3000 Information
This section contains information which is specific to HP 3000 users. It explains the use of the feature access and transparent modes, environment files, downloading VFC files, carriage control, perforation skip mode, and discusses recoverability.
Feature Access and Transparent Modes
During system device configuration, the LineJet printer is configured to default to either the transparent or feature access mode. In the transparent mode, the printer prints (but does not execute) all data including control codes and escape sequences. In the feature access mode, the supported control codes and escape sequences are executed. The user can access the non-default mode using either the FDEVICECONTROL intrinsic (for programs) or an environment file.
VFC Download with a Serial Interface
Typically, VFC download was only possible for 256X and HP 2300 Series printers with an HPIB interface using the CIPER driver. MPE V/E T-MIT and above support a software product called Workstation Configurator that allows serial printers to “download” VFC by placing the VFC escape sequence in an initialization string instead of embedding them within the application.
The process of downloading VFC using Workstation Configurator is different than when using an HPIB printer. Workstation Configurator has a utility that allows modification to two different files that allow for, among other things, setting initialization strings, flow control, and VFC. Workstation Configurator has a terminal type file that is used for certain functions and a VFC file that is used for setting the initialization strings and the VFC. These files are not in the same format as the HPIB VFC file and must be created using Workstation
Configurator.
When using the VFC file created using Workstation Configurator, the user must specify the terminal type file in the HP 3000 I/O Configuration, or by referencing it with the ENV parameter of the FILE statement. The
DOWNLOAD command will NOT operate in this configuration.
If the ENV parameter of the FILE statement is used, the associated terminal type file that has been configured with the printer will still be sent to the printer first and the terminal type file that has been specified with the ENV parameter will be sent NEXT. This does not create any problems, it just should be noted when using a datascope or analyzing a spool file.
74
Carriage-Control Directives
Carriage-Control Directives
The HP 3000 software drivers allow users to embed the following carriagecontrol directives in files:
ASCII SYMBOL
“ ”
“+”
“-”
“0”
“1”
“C”
CARRIAGE ACTION
Single space (with or without automatic page eject).
No space, return (next printing at column 1).
Triple space (without automatic page eject).
Double space (without automatic page eject).
Page eject (form feed). Selects VFC channel 1.
Sets single-space option, without automatic page eject (66 lines-per-page).
The carriage-control directive is placed in column 1 of the file and is executed
(but not printed) when the file is printed. When using this feature, all other characters placed in column 1 will be ignored (not printed).
When using the carriage-control directives, the application must use carriage control and [;CCTL] must be included in the file equation as shown in the following example:
:file [filename];dev=[device number];cctl
Graphics
When using graphics, the line feed generated by the driver must be suppressed or there will be 1/6” or 1/8” spacing between raster lines. One way to do this is to add a “+” to the front of the file as carriage control (the file equation must have “;CCTL.”)
Printing in the Perforation Skip Region
When using the HP 3000, an automatic page eject occurs when the perforation skip region is entered. There are three ways to avoid a page eject and allow printing in the perforation skip region:
• Set the text length = logical page length = physical page length on the front panel.
• Use carriage control with a “C” in column 1 (the application must use carriage control).
• Set the carriage control to null (no CR-LF at end of line) and programmatically add a CR-LF to the end of each record.
75
Chapter 2 HP 1000 Information
HP 1000 Information
The LineJet printer may be commanded into either the transparent or feature access mode. In the transparent mode, the printer prints (but does not execute) all data including control codes and escape sequences. In the feature access mode, the control codes and escape sequences are executed.
All configuration information is located in the DVC12 Graphics Printer Driver
Reference Manual (P/N 92068-90022). For HP 1000 A-Series information, refer to the Driver Reference Manual (P/N 92077-90011) and the RTE-A
System Design Manual (P/N 92077-90013). To set transparent mode with the
DVC12 driver, the following command can be used where LU is the logical unit address of the printer: --CN,LU,30B,20B
Downloading VFC
All information concerning downloading VFC files is contained in the DVC12
Graphics Printer Driver Reference Manual (P/N 92068-90022).
B-4 Carriage-Control Directives
The HP 1000 software drivers allow users to embed the following carriagecontrol directives in files:
ASCII SYMBOL
“ ”
“+” or “*”
“-”
“0”
“1”
CARRIAGE ACTION
Single space (with or without automatic page eject).
No space, return (next printing at column 1).
Triple space (without automatic page eject).
Double space (without automatic page eject).
Page eject (form feed). Selects VFC channel 1.
The carriage-control directive is placed in column 1 of the file and is executed
(but not printed) when the file is printed. When using this feature, all other characters placed in column 1 are ignored (not printed).
Perforation Skip Mode
To override the HP 1000 driver's automatic page eject, see the Control
Requests section of the DVC12 Graphics Printer Driver Reference Manual
(P/N 92068-90022).
76
3
P-Series Printer Emulation
Overview
This chapter describes the P-Series emulation host control codes.
“Emulation” refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language. A printer control language is the coding system used to convey, manipulate, and print data. It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation. In this manual, the terms emulation, printer protocol, and printer control language are synonymous.
In the P-Series emulation mode, your printer can print files coded for the P-
Series printer control language. To select the P-Series emulation mode as the active printer emulation, select LinePrinter+ from the EMULATION menu and
P-Series from the Printer Protocol menu, as described in the User’s Guide.
The P-Series emulation provides many configurable parameters. The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 13. You can modify the emulation parameter values in two ways:
• The P-Series host control codes. An extensive set of P-Series control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream. Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the P-Series control code commands.
• The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the P-
Series emulation parameters using the printer configuration menus, control panel keys and LCD, as described in the User’s Guide.
A parameter value set by a host control code generally overrides a value set from the printer’s control panel.
Note Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer’s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory defaults. The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User’s Guide.
77
Chapter 3 Overview
P-Series Default Values and States
The factory settings for the P-Series emulation menu options are shown in
Table 13. Table 14 lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the LinePrinter+ formatting menus. (The EMULATION menu options are described in the User’s Guide ). Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options.
Table 13. P-Series Default Settings
Characteristic
Control Code 06
Control Code 08
Define CR Code
Auto LF
Overstrike
Define LF Code
Select SFCC
EVFU Selected
Alternate Set 80-9F
Character Set
Primary Subset
Extended Subset
SFCC d Command
Default Setting
8.0 LPI
Elongated
CR = CR
Disable
Enable
LF = CR + LF
1
Enable
Control Code
IBM PC
ASCII (USA)
Code Page 437
Even Dot Plot
78
P-Series Default Values and States
Table 14. LinePrinter+ Menu Option Factory Settings
Characteristic
CPI
LPI
Typeface
Proportional Spacing
Bold Print
Italic Print
Slashed Zero
Left Margin
Right Margin
Bottom Margin
Perforation Skip
Form Length
Form Width
Default Setting
10.0
6.0
Data Processing
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
0 columns
0 columns
0 lines
Disable
11.0 inches
279.4 millimeters
66 lines
13.6 inches
345.4 millimeters
136 characters
79
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
The remainder of this chapter describes the P-Series printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer, in order to invoke and configure numerous P-Series emulation functions.
Format for Control Code Descriptions
The following information is listed for each code function (where applicable):
Name The title or function of the command.
ASCII Code The ASCII mnemonic for the command is shown. Command sequences are in 7-bit (ASCII) form.
Hex Code The code or command sequence in hexadecimal numbers.
Dec Code The code or command sequence in decimal numbers.
Purpose The function(s) of the control code.
Discussion A discussion of the uses of the code or command sequence, including exceptions or limitations to its use.
Example A sample is provided for some control codes when it is possible to illustrate the effect of a control code, or if a specific syntax is required to complete the program statement (i.e. Horizontal Tab set, Vertical Tab set/clear).
Note If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description, unpredictable results may occur.
Switching Between the Emulations
The printer supports several different emulations. PCL-II is the default. P-
Series, Proprinter III XL, and Epson FX-1050 are all a part of the LinePrinter
Plus emulation.
The following command switches from PCL-II to P-Series:
ESC%-00000X
To switch from P-Series to PCL-II, send the following command to the printer:
ESC|};KD
80
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) Header
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) Header
A Special Function Control Code (SFCC) is used to extend the control code protocol. The SFCC is the control code introducer (or header); it is the first input in the sequence of parameters. The general control code sequence is:
(SFCC)(parameter 1)(parameter 2)...(parameter n )
P-Series codes can be configured to use any value from 1 through 127 (hex
01 through hex 7F) as control code introducers. For example, bold print could be configured to be enabled in the P-Series protocol using any of the control code introducers listed in Table 15.
Table 15. SFCC Example (Bold Print)
ASCII
SOH G
ETX G
ESC G
^ G
~ G
01 47
03 47
1B 47
5E 47
7E 47
Hex Decimal
01 71
03 71
27 71
94 71
126 71
SFCC Command Line
Print format, print mode, or international language selection can be controlled by a longer sequence known as a command line. Command lines are string type commands placed between complete lines of text and affect the text which follows. The protocol has six command lines: PMODE, OSET, PSET,
LPI, LINES, and INCHES. Each of these command lines is discussed in this chapter under the appropriate Control Code function.
For example, the forms length (in inches) can be set using the following command line: where:
SFCC INCHES; n.f
n is the whole number of inches, and f is the fractional increment in 0.5 inch increments.
When using the SFCC in a command line, the SFCC must be the first nonblank symbol in the line (space, hex 20, is a blank symbol). In addition, characters following spaces (other than a valid line terminator) in a command line are ignored so that user comments can be included on the command line.
The valid line terminators are Form Feed (FF), Line Feed (LF), and Carriage
Return (CR); however, when used in the command line, these line terminators do not cause any paper motion. If a command line contains an error, the command will not be executed.
81
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Attribute Set and Reset Codes
Certain print attributes are set and reset (turned on or off) by using the appropriate SFCC code sequence and the numbers 1 or 0. These may be either the hexadecimal code 01 and 00, or the ASCII code for the printable symbols of decimal 1 and 0 (hexadecimal code 31 and 30, respectively).
Expanded Print, Super/Subscript Print, and Underline are attributes that are set/reset this way.
NUL Code
NUL (hex 00) is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character; however, it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space character.
Note Hex 80 in the 0437 PC Character Set and hex 7F in the 0850
PC Character Set are treated as a NUL; however, these two controls can not be used as parameter terminators.
Print Modes Supported for Character Sets
All print modes are supported for all character sets; however, for the character sets listed in Table 16, only the print modes listed are supported.
Table 16. Print Modes Supported
Character Set
Barcode 10 cpi
Multinational DP 10 cpi
Multinational DP 12 cpi
Multinational NLQ 10 cpi
Greek DP 10 cpi
Greek DP 12 cpi
Greek NLQ 10 cpi
Graphic DP 10 cpi
Graphic NLQ 10 cpi
Scientific DP 10 cpi
Scientific DP 12 cpi
Scientific NLQ 10 cpi
OCR-A
OCR-B
Mode Pitch
DP
DP
NLQ
DP
DP
DP
DP
NLQ
NLQ
DP
DP
NLQ
OCR-A 10
OCR-B 10
10
10
12
10
10
12
10
10
10
10
12
10
82
The Control Codes
The Control Codes
This index lists each printer command by function, ASCII mnemonic, and the page where the command is explained in detail. “N/A” means not applicable.
The rest of this chapter defines the control code functions for P-Series
Emulation mode. The commands are listed in alphabetical order.
Note Some control code functions can be accomplished using another control code sequence or via control panel selection.
FUNCTION
Paper Motion
Form Feed
Line Feed
Reverse
Vertical Tab
Page Format
Backspace
Carriage Return
Forms Length Set (Inches)
Forms Length Set (Lines)
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)
Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 LPI
(1 line only)
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch
Line Spacing n /72 Inch
Line Spacing n /216 Inch
VFU Commands
ASCII CODE
FF
LF
SFCC } ; n
VT
BS
CR
SFCC INCHES; n.f
SFCC LINES; n
SFCC 2
SFCC LPI
SFCC 0
SFCC LPI
ACK
SFCC f
SFCC 1
SFCC A
SFCC 3
N/A
Print Attributes
Bold Print
Bold Print (1 line only)
Bold Print Reset
Elongated (Double High) Print,
One Line Only
Elongated (Double High) Print,
Set/Reset
Emphasized Print
Emphasized Print Reset
Expanded Print (Double Wide)
One Line Only
SFCC G
SFCC j
SFCC H
SFCC h
SFCC w
SFCC E
SFCC F
SFCC k n
Expanded Print (Double Wide) SFCC W n
Overscoring
Print Mode/Pitch Selection
SFCC _ n
SFCC X m n
SFCC PMODE; n
SFCC [ n q
PAGE
98
100
109
111
85
87
99
99
100
101
101
102
103
104
111
94
94
95
96
96
104
106
86
86
86
93
83
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
FUNCTION ASCII CODE
Print Attributes (continued)
Superscript/Subscript Printing SFCC S n
Superscript/Subscript Printing
Reset
Underline
SFCC T
SFCC - n
Graphics
Plot, Even Dot (High Density) EOT
SFCC d
Plot, Odd Dot (Normal Density) ENQ
SFCC e
Other Functions
Bell
Character Set Select
Character Set Select:
ECMA Latin 1 Extended
Character Set Select:
International Languages
BEL
SFCC l xyz
SFCC OSET; n
SFCC R n
SFCC PSET; n
Characters 80-9F
(Control Codes)
Characters 80-9F
(Printable Symbols)
Emulation Reset
Extended Character Set
SFCC 7
SFCC 6
SFCC @
SO
SFCC SO
SFCC n
SFCC 4
Extended Character Set Cancel SI
(Primary Set Select) SFCC SI
SFCC o
SFCC 5
85
88
90
91
92
92
95
97
PAGE
110
110
111
105
105
97
84
Backspace
Backspace
ASCII Code BS
Hex Code 08
Dec Code 08
Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space toward the first character column.
Discussion When configured from the control panel for backspace, BS moves the character position indicator (the logical print head position) one character space to the left at the current character pitch setting. The code is ignored if the logical print head is positioned at the first character column.
Example Print and backspace two character positions.
Bell
ASCII Code BEL
Hex Code 07
Dec Code 07
Purpose Sounds the printer’s buzzer/beeper.
Discussion The BEL function will sound the buzzer/beeper for 0.2 seconds upon receipt of this command.
85
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Bold Print
ASCII Code SFCC G SFCC j
Hex Code SFCC 47 SFCC 6A
Dec Code SFCC 71 SFCC 106
Purpose Selects bold character printing.
Discussion When the bold character printing control code is received, all characters are printed in bold until reset by the bold print reset control code or printer reset. Bold Print is the same as emphasized printing.
When SFCC j is used, bold printing is selected for one line only and reset by the bold print reset control code, emulation reset, or a paper motion command.
Example The following sample illustrates bold character printing.
Bold Print Reset
ASCII Code SFCC H
Hex Code SFCC 48
Dec Code SFCC 72
Purpose Resets bold character printing.
Discussion This control code resets the bold print character attribute. Other print attributes such as double wide printing are not affected.
Example Refer to the Bold Print control code for a sample of bold character print set and reset.
86
Carriage Return
Carriage Return
ASCII Code CR
Hex Code 0D
Dec Code 13
Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column
(resets the pointer to the first character position).
Discussion The CR code may or may not cause printing or paper motion, depending on the Define CR Code value defined in the configuration menus. If the Define CR Code submenu displays:
Define CR Code
CR = CR*
The characters following the CR are printed over the previous characters on the line. If identical characters are placed in the same position on the line, those characters will be printed in bold emphasized print when the Overstrike mode is enabled from the control panel.
The CR=CR configuration causes subsequent printable data to overprint previous data at half speed if Overstrike is enabled from the control panel (and prints somewhat faster if Overstrike is disabled), unless an intervening paper motion command is received.
If the Define CR Code submenu displays:
Define CR Code
CR = CR+LF*
Control code CR is converted to perform a carriage return and line feed function.
87
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Character Set Select
ASCII Code SFCC l xyz (lowercase “L”)
Hex Code SFCC 6C xyz
Dec Code SFCC 108 xyz
Purpose Selects the character set, extended character set, and the international language for a specific character set.
where x is the character set (Table 17); y is the international language for the selected character set
(Table 18); z is the extended character set for the selected character set
(Table 19);
Discussion An asterisk (*) (hex 2A) may be submitted for x, y, or z . If the asterisk (*) is the value selected for x , the character set will not change. If * is the value selected for y or z , the previously selected international language and/or extended character set for the selected character set will be used.
The character set, international language and extended character set can also be selected from the printer control panel, via the Character Set and Print Language options; however, the control code setting will override the control panel selection.
Except for the asterisk value discussed above, values other than those shown in the tables will result in the control sequence being terminated.
Table 16 on page 82 provides detailed notes on print mode support for each character set.
Table 17. Character Set Select ( x ) x
0 (hex 30)
1 (hex 31)
2 (hex 32)
3 (hex 33)
Character Set
IBM PC
Multinational
ECMA Latin 1
DEC Multinational
88
Character Set Select
Table 18. International Language Select ( y ) x = 0 (hex 30) y
IBM PC
0 (hex 30)
1 (hex 31)
2 (hex 32)
3 (hex 33)
4 (hex 34)
5 (hex 35)
6 (hex 36)
ASCII (USA)
French
German
English (UK)
Danish
Swedish
Italian
7 (hex 37)
8 (hex 38)
Spanish
Japanese
9 (hex 39) French Canadian
10 (hex 3A) Latin American
11 (hex 3B) Norwegian
12 (hex 3C) Danish-II
13 (hex 3D) Spanish-II
14 (hex 3E) Latin American-II x = 1 (hex 31)
Multinational
ASCII (USA)
EBCDIC x = 2 (hex 32)
ECMA Latin 1
ASCII (USA)
German
Swedish
Danish
Norwegian
Finnish
English (UK)
Dutch
French
Spanish
Italian
Turkish
Japanese x = 3 (hex 33)
DEC Multinational
ASCII (USA)
French
German
English (UK)
Norwegian/Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Dutch
Finnish
Swiss z
0 (hex 30)
1 (hex 31)
2 (hex 32)
3 (hex 33)
4 (hex 34)
5 (hex 35)
6 (hex 36)
7 (hex 37)
8 (hex 38)
9 (hex 39)
10 (hex 3A)
11 (hex 3B)
12 (hex 3C)
Table 19. International Language Select ( z ) x = 0 (hex 30)
IBM PC
IBM PC (0437)
IBM PC (0850) x = 1 (hex 31)
Multinational
Mult. Extended Set x = 2 (hex 32) x = 3 (hex 33)
ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational
Barcode 10 cpi
Mult. DP 10 cpi
Mult. DP 12 cpi
Mult. NLQ 10 cpi
Greek DP 10 cpi
Greek DP 12 cpi
Greek NLQ 10 cpi
DEC Mult. Ext. Set
Graphics DP 10 cpi
Graphics NLQ 10 cpi
Scientific DP 10 cpi
Scientific DP 12 cpi
Scientific NLQ 10 cpi
Multinational (at Primary set mode and pitch)
89
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Character Set Select: ECMA Latin 1 Extended
ASCII Code SFCC OSET; n
Purpose Selects the print mode and pitch at which the extended characters will print. Valid only if the ECMA Latin 1 Extended
Character Set is selected; otherwise, this command is ignored.
Discussion n ranges from 0 through 12 (hex 00 through 0B) to select the print mode/pitch combinations available from Table 20. All other values will result in an error message.
OSET is valid only when the ECMA Latin 1 character set has been selected from the control panel. OSET will be ignored if the
IBM PC, Multinational, or DEC Multinational Character Sets are active.
Extended characters will print at the print mode and pitch selected by the OSET command, even if that mode and pitch differs from the currently selected print mode and pitch. If the print mode differs between the extended and primary characters, the first character in the data stream selects the print mode at which that line will print. Different pitches can be printed on the same line.
n
7
8
9
10
11
12
5
6
3
4
0
1
2
Table 20. Print Modes/Pitches Available Using P-Series OSET
(ECMA Latin 1, Extended Character Set Only)
Print Mode/Pitch Select
Barcode DP 10 cpi
Multinational DP 10 cpi
Multinational DP 12 cpi
Multinational NLQ 10 cpi
Greek DP 10 cpi
Greek DP 12 cpi
Greek NLQ 10 cpi
Graphics DP 10 cpi
Graphics NLQ 10 cpi
Scientific DP 10 cpi
Scientific DP 12 cpi
Scientific NLQ 10 cpi
Multinational at Primary Character Set Mode and Pitch
90
Character Set Select: International Languages
Character Set Select: International Languages
n
SFCC R
(hex)
PSET
0 (30)
1 (31)
2 (32)
3 (33)
4 (34)
5 (35)
6 (36)
7 (37)
8 (38)
9 (39)
8
9
0A (3A) 10
0B (3B) 11
0C (3C) 12
0D (3D) 13
0E (3E) 14
0F (3F) 15
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
10 (40)
11 (41)
12 (42)
13 (43)
14 (44)
15 (45)
16
17
18
19
20
21
ASCII Code SFCC PSET; n
Hex Code
Dec Code
Purpose
SFCC R
SFCC 52 n
n
SFCC 82 n
Specifies the international language set identified by n in the basic character set selected from the control panel (ECMA Latin
1, IBM PC, Multinational, and DEC Multinational). where n specifies a language, as shown in Table 21.
ASCII (USA)
German
Swedish
Danish
Norwegian
Finnish
English (UK)
Dutch
French
Spanish
Italian
Turkish
Japanese
Table 21. International Character Sets
ECMA Latin 1
Character Set Selected
IBM PC (0437 or
0850)
ASCII (USA)
French
German
English (UK)
Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Latin American
Danish-II
Spanish-II
Latin American-II
Multinational
ASCII (USA)
EBCDIC
DEC
Multinational
ASCII (USA)
French
German
English (UK)
Norw./Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Dutch
Finnish
Swiss
(currently undefined)
91
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Discussion The international character set can also be selected from the control panel via the Print Language option; however, the control code setting will override the control panel character set selection. Values other than those selectable from Table 21 will be ignored.
Example The following example illustrates international character selection using the IBM PC character set.
Characters 80-9F (Control Codes)
ASCII Code SFCC 7
Hex Code SFCC 37
Dec Code SFCC 55
Purpose Selects hex codes 80 through 9F in the character sets as control codes. Cancels the command SFCC 6.
Discussion This control code overrides the control panel setting.
Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols)
ASCII Code SFCC 6
Hex Code SFCC 36
Dec Code SFCC 54
Purpose Selects hex codes 80 through 9F in the character sets as printable symbols. Cancels the command SFCC 7.
Discussion This control code overrides the control panel setting.
92
Elongated (Double High) Print, One Line Only
Elongated (Double High) Print, One Line Only
ASCII Code SFCC h
Hex Code SFCC 68
BS
08
Dec Code SFCC 104 08
Purpose Selects elongated (double high) character printing for one line only. Elongated characters are approximately double height but standard width.
Discussion The elongated character control code is a line-by-line print attribute; when the control code is received, one entire line of elongated characters is printed and then automatically reset.
When configured for double high print, the P-Series control code
BS (Hex 08) also selects elongated character printing for a single line.
When using this feature with relative line slewing, the paper will be moved n + 1 lines rather than n lines. Refer to Chapter 7,
“Vertical Page Formatting,” for more information on relative line slewing. When using small line spacing and the lines overlap, an unexpected print format may result.
Example The following sample illustrates elongated character printing.
93
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Elongated (Double High) Print, Set/Reset
ASCII Code SFCC w n
Hex Code SFCC 77 n
Dec Code SFCC 119 n
Purpose Turns double-high character printing on and off. Double-high characters are standard width but twice as high.
where n = 1 or 49 (hex 01 or hex 31) turns double high printing on n = 0 or 48 (hex 00 or hex 30) turns double high printing off
Discussion The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double high.
Note It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage
Returns when double-high character printing is on (after an
SFCC w control code has been sent), or else the printer will overstrike text that has already printed.
If Superscript/Subscript (SFCC S) is combined with Double High printing, only Double High printing will occur.
Example The following illustrates double-high character printing.
Emphasized Print
ASCII Code SFCC E
Hex Code SFCC 45
Dec Code SFCC 69
Purpose Selects emphasized character print format.
Discussion When the emphasized print control code is received, all characters will be printed in emphasized print until reset by the emphasized print reset control code or printer reset. The emphasized print attribute is implemented by horizontal
“shadow” printing.
Emphasized print is ignored during superscript or subscript printing, and when 15-20 cpi characters have been selected.
Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing.
94
Emphasized Print Reset
Emphasized Print Reset
ASCII Code SFCC F
Hex Code SFCC 46
Dec Code SFCC 70
Purpose Resets emphasized character printing.
Discussion The emphasized print reset control code only resets the emphasized print character attribute.
Example See the Emphasized Print control code example for an example of Emphasized Print Reset.
Emulation Reset
ASCII Code SFCC @
Hex Code SFCC 40
Dec Code SFCC 64
Purpose Initializes all print mode related parameters to their factory default or power-up configuration values.
Discussion Print mode, line spacing, international language selection, margins, form length, skip-over perforation, and character pitch are reset to their selected power-up configuration values.
Character-by-character and line-by-line attributes are canceled.
The vertical format unit is cleared. The current line is set to the top-of-form position. Interface parameters and printer protocol selection are not affected.
If the menu option “Reset Cmd CFG Ld” is disabled, the factory default configuration is loaded. If it is enabled, the power-up configuration is used. The default is the factory default.
95
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Expanded Print (Double Wide), One Line Only
ASCII Code SFCC k
Hex Code SFCC 6B
Dec Code SFCC 107
Purpose Selects expanded (double wide) print for one line only.
Discussion This expanded print control code is a line-by-line print attribute; when the SFCC k control code is received, the current line is printed double wide and then automatically reset.
This control code can be reset by a paper motion control code
(LF, VT, CR, etc.), SFCC @ (printer reset), CAN or SFCC W
(double wide print).
Example The following sample illustrates Expanded Print for one line only.
Another example of expanded printing is shown for Expanded
(Double Wide) Print, SFCC W on page 96.
Expanded Print (Double Wide), Set/Reset
ASCII Code SFCC W n
Hex Code SFCC 57 n
Dec Code SFCC 87 n
Purpose where
Selects or resets expanded (double wide) print.
n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) selects expanded print.
n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) resets expanded print.
Discussion When expanded print using SFCC W is received, all characters will be printed double wide until reset by the expanded print reset control code or a printer reset.
Example The following sample illustrates expanded character printing and expanded character printing reset.
96
Extended Character Set
Extended Character Set
ASCII Code SO
Hex Code 0E
SFCC SO
SFCC 0E
SFCC n
SFCC 6E
SFCC 4
SFCC 34
Dec Code 14
Purpose
SFCC 14 SFCC 110 SFCC 52
Accesses the extended character set in the range hex A0 through FF using codes 32 through 127 (hex 20 through 7F).
Discussion Used in 7-bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 1. For example, sending code hex 20 accesses the symbol at code point hex A0.
If a printable symbol is not available at the code point, a space is printed.
SFCC 4 is not cancelled by the next paper motion command;
SO, SFCC SO, and SFCC n are cancelled by paper motion.
Example The following sample illustrates the Extended Character Set and
Extended Character Set Cancel (see page 97) control codes.
Extended Character Set Cancel (Primary Set Select)
ASCII Code SI
Hex Code 0F
Dec Code 15
SFCC SI
SFCC 0F
SFCC 15
SFCC o SFCC 5
SFCC 6F SFCC 35
SFCC 111 SFCC 53
Purpose Cancels Extended Character Set as selected by SO, SFCC SO,
SFCC n, and SFCC 4, and selects the Primary Character Set.
Discussion Used in 7-bit systems. If data bit 8 is disabled, this control code selects the range as if data bit 8 is set to 0, and data is printed as characters from 32 through 127 (hex 20 through 7F).
Example Refer to the Extended Character Set example on page 97.
97
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Form Feed
ASCII Code FF
Hex Code 0C
Dec Code 12
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, advances the paper position to the next top-of-form and moves the character position to the first character column.
Discussion The default forms length is determined by the printer configuration. Forms length is set by using the control panel or forms length control codes. Code FF cancels all single-line only print attributes.
The default form length is 11 inches. The Form Feed command will react differently when the VFU is active. Refer to Chapter 7.
98
Forms Length Set (Inches)
Forms Length Set (Inches)
ASCII Code SFCC INCHES; n.f
Purpose Sets the length of forms (paper) in inches.
where n = 1 through 24 (hex 01 through 18) specify the number of inches on a page.
f = fractional number in .5-inch increments (minimum forms length is .5 inches).
Discussion Upon receipt of this code, the current line becomes the first line of the form, and the form length set becomes the current forms length. Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the form are cleared.
Forms length is defined in inches; therefore, subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command.
Increments of .5-inch can be specified; for example, sending the following command will result in a form length setting of 7 ½ inches: SFCC INCHES; 7.5
The maximum forms length is 24 inches. All other values are ignored. In INCHES mode, incorrect values will produce an error message.
Forms length can be set by the control panel. The control code forms length setting from the host computer will override the control panel setting. If the VFU is enabled and loaded, this command is ignored.
Forms Length Set (Lines)
ASCII Code SFCC LINES; n
Purpose where
Sets the length of a form (paper) in lines.
n = 1 through 192 (hex 01 through C0) specify the number of lines per page at the current line spacing.
Discussion The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the quotient of n and the current line spacing so that the units are in inches. In LINES mode, the maximum form length is 24 inches, and n values in excess of 24 inches will cause an error message.
If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple of the target machine dot size, the forms length value will be adjusted down to the next possible multiple.
If the VFU is enabled and loaded, this command is ignored.
99
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Line Feed
ASCII Code LF
Hex Code 0A
Dec Code 10
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer (if any) and advances the vertical character position one line at the current line space setting.
Discussion If configured for LF equals new line (LF=CR+LF), the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line.
Otherwise, the logical print head does not move when configured for LF function only (LF=LF ONLY). The LF function cancels all single line print attributes such as double high
(elongated) and double wide (expanded) characters.
This code is always configured for LF=CR+LF in the P-Series protocol.
In the P-Series Even Dot Plot mode (high density graphics), the
LF code does not cause paper position motion; the data in the buffer is plotted and the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 in anticipation of the Odd Dot Plot control code to complete high density graphic plotting.
In the P-Series Odd Dot Plot mode (normal density graphics), the LF code plots the data in the buffer, advances the paper position a single dot row at the current vertical dot density, and positions the logical print head at character column 1.
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)
ASCII Code SFCC 2
Hex Code SFCC 32
Dec Code SFCC 50
SFCC LPI; n
Purpose Sets line spacing to 6 lpi or as set by SFCC A (page 103).
Discussion For SFCC LPI; n , the value of n can be 6 or 8 only. If n = 6, this command sets line spacing to 1/6 inch. Values of n other than 6 or 8 will cause an error message.
SFCC 2 asserts n /72-inch line spacing as set by SFCC A (page
103). If no distance has been set by SFCC A, the distance is 1/6”
The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting.
Example The following example illustrates 1/6-inch line spacing and assumes that a distance has not been set by ESC A.
100
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)
ASCII Code SFCC 0
Hex Code SFCC 30
SFCC LPI; n
Dec Code SFCC 48
Purpose Specifies continuous line spacing at 1/8-inch increments (8 lpi).
Discussion When the 1/8-inch line spacing control code is received, all lines will be printed at 8 lpi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting.
For SFCC LPI; n , the value of n can be 6 or 8 only. If n = 8, this command sets line spacing to 1/8 inch. Values of n other than 6 or 8 will cause an error message.
Example The following example illustrates 1/8-inch line spacing.
Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 lpi (1 Line Only)
ASCII Code ACK
Hex Code 06
Dec Code 06
SFCC f
SFCC 66
SFCC 102
Purpose Selects line spacing of 8 or 10.3 lpi for the current line only.
Discussion The default line spacing is reselected automatically after one line. Line spacing may be selected either through the control panel or by line spacing control codes. The control code setting will override the control panel line spacing setting.
If the alternate line spacing selected from the control panel is 8 lpi, the ACK control code will set the line spacing to 8 lpi. If 10.3 lpi was selected from the control panel, the ACK control code will set the line spacing to 10.3 lpi (7/72”).
Example The following example illustrates printing a single line of text at 8 lpi.
101
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch
ASCII Code SFCC 1
Hex Code SFCC 31
Dec Code SFCC 49
Purpose Specifies the line spacing at 7/72-inch (10.3 lpi) increments.
Discussion When the 7/72-inch line spacing control code is received, all lines will be printed at the 7/72-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting, and the message display will reflect the line spacing as
10.3 lines per inch.
Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),
Superscript, or Subscript; overlapping lines may occur. Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.
Example The following example illustrates 7/72-inch line spacing.
102
Line Spacing n/72 Inch
Line Spacing n/72 Inch
ASCII Code SFCC A n
Hex Code SFCC 41 n
Dec Code SFCC 65 n
Purpose Stores a line spacing of n /72-inch increments.
where n = 1 through 85 (hex 01 through 55). All others are ignored.
Discussion When the SFCC A control sequence is received, all line feed commands following an SFCC 2 sequence* will be at n /72-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting.
*The SFCC 2 sequence (page 100) asserts the line spacing which was stored by the preceding SFCC A sequence.
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines. Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated
(Double High), Superscript, or Subscript characters are used on the same line. Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.
Example The following example illustrates 20/72-inch line spacing.
103
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Line Spacing n/216 Inch
ASCII Code SFCC 3 n
Hex Code SFCC 33 n
Dec Code SFCC 51 n
Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n /216-inch increments.
where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through FF).
Discussion When the n /216-inch line spacing control code is received, all line feeds following will be at n /216-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting.
The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is added to the next paper motion command.
Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),
Superscript, or Subscript; overlapping lines may occur. Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.
Example The following example illustrates n /216-inch line spacing.
Overscoring
ASCII Code SFCC _ n
Hex Code SFCC 5F n
Dec Code SFCC 95 n
Purpose where
Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all characters.
n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) selects overscore print.
n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) resets overscore print.
Discussion When automatic overscore is enabled, all characters, including spaces, will be overscored until disabled.
Example The following sample illustrates automatic overscoring and overscoring reset.
104
Plot, Even Dot (P-Series High Density Graphics)
Plot, Even Dot (P-Series High Density Graphics)
ASCII Code EOT
Hex Code 04
SFCC d
SFCC 64
Dec Code 04
Purpose
SFCC 100
Prints dots at the even numbered dot columns.
Discussion The even dot plot code is used for programming high density graphics and must be used in conjunction with the Odd Dot Plot code (hex 05). Refer to the Plot Mode section in Chapter 6 for detailed plot mode information.
Example Print two high density plot boxes using odd and even dot plot for high density graphics. Compare the example below to the normal density odd dot plot example.
Plot, Odd Dot (P-Series Normal Density Graphics)
ASCII Code ENQ
Hex Code 05
Dec Code 05
SFCC e
SFCC 65
SFCC 101
Purpose Prints dots at the odd numbered dot columns.
Discussion This is the P-Series programming normal density graphics control code. The ENQ code should occur before any printable data in the data stream. For high density graphics, the Even Dot
Plot code (04 hex) must be used in conjunction with (and precede) the Odd Dot Plot code. Refer to the P-Series
Compatible Plot mode section in Chapter 6 for detailed plot mode information.
Example Print two normal density plot boxes using odd dot plot. Compare the odd dot plot example below to the high density Even Dot Plot example.
105
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Print Mode/Pitch Selection
ASCII Code SFCC PMODE; n
Hex Code
Dec Code
Purpose
SFCC X mn
SFCC 58 n mn SFCC 5B n 71
SFCC 88 mn SFCC 91 n 113
Selects the print mode and character pitch in characters per inch
(cpi).
where where where
In SFCC PMODE; n n = 0 through 11 to select the print mode/pitch combinations available from Table 22. All other values will result in an error message.
In SFCC [ n q n = Print Mode/Pitch code (values other than those shown in
Table 23 are ignored.) q = Command sequence terminator
In SFCC X mn m = Print Mode code n = Pitch (cpi)
An asterisk (*) (hex 2A) may be substituted for m or n.
Whenever the asterisk replaces m or n , its current value will not change.
Values other than those shown in Table 24 and Table 25 are ignored.
Note The print mode must be changed before the first printable symbol or space of a print line or the command sequence is deferred until the next line.
Discussion P-Series PMODE switches to the Primary Character Set and selects print mode and pitch.
Print mode and pitch can also be selected from the control panel. The print mode/pitch select control code from the host computer will override the control panel print mode setting and the print mode and pitch selection will be reflected on the message display.
If PMODE 7 through 11 are selected to enable upside down characters, the printing is still left to right. Even though characters are upside down, you must reverse the order to read left to right.
A complete set of tables identifying print mode, pitch, and dot densities for all print modes follows.
106
Print Mode/Pitch Selection
Table 22. Print Mode and Pitch (SFCC PMODE; n ) n
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
10
11
8
9
Print Mode and Pitch
DP 10 cpi
DP 12 cpi
DP 15 cpi
NLQ 10 cpi
HS 10 cpi
OCR-A 10 cpi
OCR-B 10 cpi
DP 10 cpi upside down
DP 12 cpi upside down
DP 13 cpi upside down
DP 15 cpi upside down
DP 17 cpi upside down
Table 23. Print Mode and Pitch (SFCC [ n q)
Print Mode and Pitch n
1 (hex 31)
2 (hex 32)
3 (hex 33)
4 (hex 34)
5 (hex 35)
NLQ 10 cpi
DP 10 cpi
HS 12 cpi
DP 12 cpi
DP 13 cpi
107
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Table 24. Horizontal and Vertical Dot Density (SFCC X) m (Hex*)
Horiz. Density
Resolution
Vertical Density Print Mode
0 (30)
1 (31)
2 (32)
3 (33)
4 (34)
5 (35)
6 (36)
7 (37)
120 dpi
180 dpi
120 dpi
120 dpi
120 dpi
120 dpi
120 dpi
120 dpi
72 dpi
96 dpi
48 dpi
48 dpi
48 dpi
144 dpi
144 dpi
72 dpi
DP
NLQ
HS
HS
HS
OCR-A
OCR-B
DP
8 (38) 120 dpi 72 dpi DP
*The hex values shown (i.e., 0 and 30) are equal. Either value can be used in your program expression.
Table 25. Print Mode and Character Pitches (SFCC X)
Characters Per Inch value of n : value of m :
Print Mode*
DP
0 (30)
NLQ
1 (31)
HS
2 (32)
HS
3 (33)
HS
4 (34)
OCR-A
5 (35)
OCR-B
6 (36)
DP
7 (37)
DP
8 (38)
0 (30)
1 (31)
2 (32)
3 (33)
4 (34)
5 (35)
10
12
13
15
17
20
10
12
13
15
17
20
10
12
13
15
17
20
10
12
13
15
17
20
10
12
13
15
17
20
–
–
–
–
10
–
–
–
–
–
10
–
–
–
–
–
10
–
*The hex values shown (i.e., 0 and 30) are equal. Either value can be used in your program expression.
The value of m is represented by the font choice line.
–
–
–
–
10
–
108
Reverse
Note The character set used when OCR-A or OCR-B are selected depends on the Standard character set currently selected.
The character set can be changed by using SFCC l or by using the front panel.
Example Any of the BASIC expressions listed below will select the DP print mode at 17 cpi.
where m (print mode) = SOH (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) n (pitch) = EOT (hex 04) or 4 (hex 34)
CHR$(1);“X”;CHR$(0);CHR$(4);
CHR$(1);“X”;CHR$(30);CHR$(34);
CHR$(1);“X04”;
Reverse
ASCII Code SFCC } ; n
Hex Code SFCC 7D 3B n
Dec Code SFCC 125 59 n
Purpose Moves the logical print head up.
Discussion If n is “L,” the print head moves up one line. (Reverse line feed.)
If n is “P,” the print head moves up to the previous top of form.
(Reverse form feed.)
109
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
Superscript/Subscript Printing
ASCII Code SFCC S n
Hex Code SFCC 53 n
Dec Code SFCC 83 n
Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing.
Discussion An SFCC S code can be set for superscript or subscript printing, as follows: where n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) enables subscript printing.
n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) enables superscript printing.
When this control code is received, all characters will be superscript or subscript until reset by the super/subscript printing reset control code (SFCC T) or printer reset. Use caution when combining this command with other print attributes; arbitrary combinations might yield unexpected results.
Note Superscript and subscript characters print at the same size as the current font. They are shifted up or down one half of a line.
Example The following sample illustrates superscript/subscript printing.
Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset
ASCII Code SFCC T
Hex Code SFCC 54
Dec Code SFCC 84
Purpose Resets superscript and subscript printing.
Example See the Superscript/Subscript Printing command example.
110
Underline
Underline
ASCII Code SFCC - n
Hex Code SFCC 2D n
Dec Code SFCC 45 n
Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters.
where n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) enables automatic underlining.
n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) disables automatic underlining.
Discussion When automatic underline is enabled, all characters, including spaces, will be underlined until disabled.
Example The following sample illustrates automatic underlining.
VFU Commands
ASCII Code Refer to the P-Series VFU section in Chapter 7.
Purpose Load and execute the VFU.
Discussion Refer to Chapter 7 for detailed information.
Vertical Tab
ASCII Code VT
Hex Code 0B
Dec Code 11
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the next vertical tab position.
Discussion If a vertical tab format is defined in the EVFU (channel 12) and the VFU is enabled, the paper is moved to the next vertical tab position.
If a vertical tab format is not defined, the paper is advanced to the next line at the current line spacing. More information on
Vertical Tabs is provided in the EVFU section of Chapter 7.
111
Chapter 3 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
112
4
IBM Proprinter III XL
Emulation
Overview
This chapter describes the Proprinter III XL emulation host control codes.
“Emulation” refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language. A printer control language is the coding system used to convey, manipulate, and print data. It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation. In this manual, the terms “emulation”, “printer protocol”, and “printer control language” are synonymous.
In the Proprinter III XL emulation mode, your printer can print files coded for the Proprinter III XL printer control language. To select the Proprinter emulation as the active printer emulation, select LinePrinter+ from the
EMULATION menu and Proprinter III XL from the Printer Protocol menu, as described in the User’s Guide.
The Proprinter III XL emulation provides many configurable parameters. The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 26. You can modify these parameter values in two ways:
• The Proprinter III XL host control codes. An extensive set of Proprinter
III XL control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream. Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the Proprinter III XL control code commands.
• The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the
Proprinter III XL emulation parameters using the printer configuration menus, control panel keys, and LCD, as described in the User’s Guide.
Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings that result from the configuration menus.
Note Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer’s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory default configuration. The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User’s Guide.
113
Chapter 4 Overview
Proprinter III XL Emulation Default Settings
The factory settings for the Proprinter III XL emulation menu options are shown in Table 26. Table 27 lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the LinePrinter+ formatting menus. (The EMULATION menu options are described in the User’s Guide ). Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options.
Table 26. Proprinter III XL Menu Option Factory Settings
Characteristic
Define CR Code
Auto LF
Define LF Code
FF Valid at TOF
Character Set
Alt. Char Set
20 CPI Condensed
Default Setting
CR = CR
Enable
LF = LF
Enable
Code Page 437
Set 1
Enable
114
Proprinter III XL Emulation Default Settings
Table 27. LinePrinter+ Menu Option Factory Settings
Characteristic
CPI
LPI
Typeface
Proportional Spacing
Bold Print
Italic Print
Slashed Zero
Left Margin
Right Margin
Bottom Margin
Perforation Skip
Form Length
Form Width
Default Setting
10.0
6.0
Data Processing
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
0 columns
0 columns
0 lines
Disable
11.0 inches
279.4 millimeters
66 lines
13.6 inches
345.4 millimeters
136 characters
115
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control
Codes
The remainder of this chapter describes the Proprinter printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer, in order to configure numerous Proprinter emulation parameters.
Format for Control Code Descriptions
In this chapter, the following information is listed for each control code (where applicable):
Name The title or function of the command.
ASCII Code The ASCII mnemonic for the command is shown. Command sequences are in 7-bit (ASCII) form.
Hex Code The code or command sequence in hexadecimal numbers.
Dec Code The code or command sequence in decimal numbers.
Purpose The function(s) of the control code.
Discussion A discussion of the uses of the code or command sequence, including exceptions or limitations to its use.
Example A sample is provided when it is possible to illustrate the effect of a control code or if a specific syntax is required.
Note If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description, unpredictable results may occur. The PI line is never recognized in Proprinter III XL Emulation mode.
Escape Control Codes Overview
Printer capability is greatly increased by the use of escape control code sequences. Escape sequences always begin with the ASCII escape sequence introducer, ESC (hex 1B). Many of the ASCII control codes described in this chapter are escape sequences.
IMPORTANT An Escape code can occur anywhere in the datastream and is acted upon immediately if it precedes a valid command.
An ESC sequence introducer in the data stream signals the printer to wait for special instructions, even if it is ready and printing. The character codes following the ESC character tell the printer what to do.
Note For readability, code sequences appear in this manual with spaces inserted between command elements. Do not insert spaces between code characters when you are programming unless the ASCII space character (SP) is part of a code sequence. For example, a code sequence printed in this manual as ESC [ 1 is programmed as ESC[1.
116
Graphics Control Codes Overview
An escape sequence uses two or more bytes to define a specific printer control function. The format for an escape sequence is:
ASCII
Hex
ESC
1B
Escape Sequence
Introducer
X
00-7F
Character(s) n
0-FF
Numerical parameter(s)
After the ESC character are one or more characters which indicate the action of the control code. One or more numerical parameters may in turn follow these characters. For example, the sequence ESC S n tells the printer to begin the superscript print attribute if n is an even number, or to begin the subscript attribute if n is an odd number.
If the characters following the ESC code are not within the defined ranges, or if they are within the defined ranges but not recognized as a function of this printer, the entire sequence is ignored.
Graphics Control Codes Overview
The individual control codes that set graphics print quality are described starting on page 123. Some additional background information about graphics printing for the Proprinter III XL emulation is provided here.
The Proprinter III XL emulation provides one data protocol for printing graphics information; the Bit Image graphics protocol allows an image block to be printed. When using the Bit Image protocol, you can mix text and graphics on the same line.
Setting Bit Image Modes via Control Codes
Control codes select bit image modes. The following bit image modes can be mixed on the same line as text characters:
Table 28. Bit Image Modes
Control Code
ESC K n1 n2 data
ESC L n1 n2 data
ESC Y n1 n2 data
ESC Z n1 n2 data
Bit Image Mode
Normal Density
Double Density
Double Density, Double Speed
Quadruple Density
Parameters n1 and n2 together represent a 16-bit (hexadecimal) unsigned number of the quantity ( n1 + 256 n2 ), which equals the number of bit image characters (i.e. data bytes) to follow. If n1 and n2 are programmed so that data extends past the last character position, the data is truncated at the last character position. If n1 and n2 are both zero, the ESC sequence is ignored.
See Chapter 6 for details on bit image graphics.
117
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Dot Density Versus Printing Speed
When you select ESC K (normal density), the dot columns are printed at 60 dots per inch (dpi) horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. This does not decrease printing speed.
If ESC L (double density) is selected, the dot columns are printed at 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. Double density reduces printing speed by one half.
With ESC Y (double density, double speed), dot columns are printed at 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically, but adjacent dots are not printed. Double density, double speed does not decrease printing speed.
When ESC Z (quadruple density) is selected, the dot columns are printed at
240 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. Quadruple density reduces printing speed by one half.
All line-by-line character print attributes are ignored in Bit Image graphics. The most significant bit for each data character is the uppermost dot position in the vertical dot image pattern. A bit value of 1 indicates a dot; a value of 0 indicates a blank. In 7-bit RS-232E serial interface protocol, the most significant bit (bit 8) is cleared to 0.
Code Page and Character Set Control Codes
A code page is a set of symbols consisting of letters, numbers, and graphic elements. For the Proprinter III XL emulation, your printer supports characters from IBM’s Code Page 0437 and Code Page 0850, among an extensive array of different print quality and print language sets. The print language sets are selected using the Print Language configuration menu option, which is described in detail in your User’s Guide.
Two columns of characters, hex 80 through 9F, may be configured as either control codes or printable symbols. Control code ESC 7 selects Character Set
1 (hex 80-9F configured as control codes). Control code ESC 6 selects
Character Set 2 (hex 80-9F configured as printable symbols).
Ignored Codes
The control codes recognized by the Proprinter III XL emulation software are described in this chapter. Control codes not described in this chapter are undefined and ignored. In addition, codes that represent printable characters
(hex 10, 11, 15, 21-7E, and 80-FF) are not available as Proprinter III XL control codes.
Note Entering control codes that are not defined in this chapter may produce unpredictable results.
The ASCII control code ETX (hex code 03 or 1B 03) is ignored as a Proprinter
III XL control code, but is valid for the Serial Interface Protocol.
118
Switching Between the Emulations
Reserved Codes
The Download Characters control code (ASCII code ESC =, hex code 1B 3D) is a reserved code. It is not implemented at this time. When implemented, this code is usually followed by large blocks of data. The Proprinter III XL emulation will currently ignore this control code and any data applicable to it.
Switching Between the Emulations
The printer supports several different emulations. PCL-II is the default. P-
Series, Proprinter III XL, and Epson FX-1050 are all a part of the LinePrinter
Plus emulation.
The following command switches from PCL-II to Proprinter:
ESC%-00001X
To switch from Proprinter to PCL-II, send the following command to the printer:
ESC|};KD
119
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
The Control Codes
This index lists each printer command by function, ASCII mnemonic, and the page where the command is explained in detail. The rest of this chapter defines the control code functions for Proprinter III XL emulation mode. The commands are listed in alphabetical order.
FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE
Paper Motion
Form Feed
Line Feed
Line Feed n /216 Inch
(One Line Only)
Tab, Vertical
Tab Set/Clear, Vertical
Tabs, Clear All
Format
Backspace
Cancel
Carriage Return
Carriage Return Set
Forms Length Set in Inches
Forms Length Set in Lines
Margin, Bottom
Margin Cancel, Bottom
Margins, Horizontal
Set Top-of-Form
Tab, Horizontal
Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal
Tabs, Clear All
FF
LF
ESC J
VT
BS
CAN
CR
ESC 5 n
ESC C NUL n
ESC C n
ESC N n
ESC O
ESC X n m
ESC 4
HT
ESC D n1 n2...nk NUL
ESC R n
ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL
ESC R
134
138
139
152
153
153
122
128
128
129
134
135
144
144
144
149
151
151
153
Line Spacing
Line Spacing 1/8” (8 lpi)
Line Spacing 7/72” (10.3 lpi)
Line Spacing n /72 Inch
(Executes)
Line Spacing n /72 Inch
(Storage)
Line Spacing n /216 Inch
ESC 0
ESC 1
ESC 2
ESC A n
ESC 3 n
Selection of Alternate Character Set 80-9F
Character Set Select: Set 1 (A) ESC 7
Character Set Select: Set 2 (B) ESC 6
140
140
141
142
143
129
129
120
The Control Codes
FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE
Print Quality
Bold Printing
Bold Printing, Cancel
Character Pitch 12 cpi
Condensed Print
Condensed Print, Cancel
Double Wide Print
ESC G
ESC H
ESC :
SI
DC2
ESC W
Double Wide Print (1 Line Only) SO
Double Wide Print (1 Line Only), n
Cancel
Emphasized Print
Emphasized Print, Cancel
DC4
ESC E
ESC F n
Print Mode
Print Quality
Proportional Spacing
Select Attributes
ESC I
ESC x n
n
ESC P n
ESC [ @ n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3 148
Superscript/Subscript Printing ESC S n 150
132
133
133
145
146
147
147
Superscript/Subscript Printing,
Cancel
Underline
ESC T
ESC - n
127
127
129
130
130
131
132
150
154
Bit Image
Bit Image Mode, Single Density
(Normal Speed)
Bit Image Mode, Double Density
(Half Speed)
Bit Image Mode, Double Density
(Normal Speed)
ESC K
ESC L
n1 n2
n1 n2
ESC Y n1 n2
Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density
(Half Speed) ESC Z n1 n2
Other Functions
Bell
Deselect Printer
Escape Sequence
Initialize Parameters
Print All Characters
Print Next Character
Unidirectional Printing
BEL
ESC Q 22
ESC
ESC [ K n1 NUL n2 n3 n4 n5
ESC \ n1 n2
ESC ^ n
ESC U n
123
124
125
126
122
131
116
136
145
146
154
121
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Backspace
ASCII Code BS
Hex Code 08
Dec Code 08
Purpose Moves the logical print head left one character space toward the first character column.
Discussion BS moves the character position indicator one character space to the left at the current character pitch setting. This code is ignored if the logical print head is positioned at the first character column.
When the backspace code is received, printing speed will be reduced. If the printer is in double width mode, the backspace code moves the print head left two normal character spaces.
Example Print and backspace two character positions.
Bell
ASCII Code BEL
Hex Code 07
Dec Code 07
Purpose Sounds a buzzer/beeper.
Discussion The BEL function will sound one beep upon receipt of this command.
122
Bit Image Mode, Single Density (Normal Speed)
Bit Image Mode, Single Density (Normal Speed)
ASCII Code ESC K n1 n2
Hex Code 1B 4B n1 n2
Dec Code 27 75 n1 n2
Purpose Selects single (normal) density bit image graphics.
where n1 + 256 n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256
(quotient of division)
Discussion This code prints specified data as bit image graphics at normal density, 60 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically. For more information, see “Bit Image Graphics” on page 201.
Example The following example produces a pattern of Single Density Bit
Image graphics. The 9-byte bit pattern is repeated 27 times.
Compare this example to the double density and quadruple density examples.
123
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Half Speed)
ASCII Code ESC L n1 n2
Hex Code 1B 4C n1 n2
Dec Code 27 76 n1 n2
Purpose Selects double density bit image graphics.
where n1 + 256 n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256
(quotient of division)
Discussion This code prints specified data as bit image graphics at double horizontal density, 120 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically. This code causes print speed to be reduced by half from normal density speed. For more information, see “Bit
Image Graphics” on page 201.
Example The following example produces Double Density Bit Image graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image
Mode example. Note that the amount of data must be doubled in order to produce this pattern for double density (the data is used
54 times rather than 27).
124
Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Normal Speed)
Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Normal Speed)
ASCII Code ESC Y n1 n2
Hex Code 1B 59 n1 n2
Dec Code 27 89 n1 n2
Purpose Selects double density bit image graphics at single density speed.
where n1 + 256 n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256
(quotient of division)
Discussion This code prints specified data as bit image graphics at double horizontal density, 120 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically. By ignoring adjacent dots, the print speed is not reduced from the normal density speed. For more information, see “Bit Image Graphics” on page 201.
Example The following example produces a Double Density Normal
Speed Bit Image graphics for the same pattern as in the Normal
(Single) Density example. Note that the amount of data must be doubled for double density (the data is used 54 times rather than
27).
125
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density (Half Speed)
ASCII Code ESC Z n1 n2
Hex Code 1B 5A n1 n2
Dec Code 27 90 n1 n2
Purpose Selects quadruple density bit image graphics.
where n1 + 256 n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256
(quotient of division)
Discussion This code prints specified data as bit image graphics at quadruple density, 240 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically. This code causes print speed to be reduced by half. For more information, see “Bit Image Graphics” on page
201.
Example The following example produces quadruple density graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example.
Note that the amount of data must be quadrupled for quadruple density (the data is used 108 times rather than 27).
126
Bold Printing
Bold Printing
ASCII Code ESC G
Hex Code 1B 47
Dec Code 27 71
Purpose Selects bold character printing.
Discussion When this command is received, all characters are printed in bold until reset by the Bold Print Reset control code or printer reset. The bold print attribute is implemented by increasing the dot density for the bold text (with a result similar to emphasized printing). Bold printing reduces the current print speed by one half.
Note The ESC E (page 133) and ESC G commands are equivalent; they produce the same print effect.
Example The following sample illustrates bold character printing.
Bold Printing, Cancel
ASCII Code ESC H
Hex Code 1B 48
Dec Code 27 72
Purpose Cancels bold printing.
Discussion No other print attributes are changed.
127
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Cancel
ASCII Code CAN
Hex Code 18
Dec Code 24
Purpose Clears the print buffer of all symbols since the last paper motion command was received.
Discussion The CAN command cancels all characters sent to the printer after the last paper motion command.
This command will cancel the double wide attribute if set by SO.
No other print attributes are affected.
Carriage Return
ASCII Code CR
Hex Code 0D
Dec Code 13
Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column
(resets the pointer to the first character position). May be configured to include a line feed.
Discussion The CR code is configured via the ESC 5 code or via the control panel menus (described in the User’s Guide ). The CR = CR configuration causes the character position indicator to be positioned at character column one; subsequent printable data preceding a paper motion command overstrikes previously printed data. The CR = CR + LF configuration causes the CR code to perform a carriage return plus a line feed.
The CR code also cancels expanded (double wide) print when set by code SO (single line printing attribute).
128
Carriage Return Set
Carriage Return Set
ASCII Code ESC 5 n
Hex Code 1B 35 n
Dec Code 27 53 n
Purpose Defines the result from the Carriage Return (CR) code.
where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).
If n = 0, 2, 4 ... (any even value), then CR = CR (the default).
If n = 1, 3, 5 ... (any odd value), then CR = CR + LF.
Discussion This command overrides the configuration menu setting.
• CR = CR (default) configuration causes the character position indicator to be positioned at character column one. Subsequent printable data preceding a paper motion command overstrikes previous printable data.
• CR = CR + LF configuration causes the CR code to perform a carriage return plus a line feed.
Character Pitch 12 cpi
ASCII Code ESC :
Hex Code 1B 3A
Dec Code 27 58
Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 cpi.
Discussion An ESC : code overrides any control panel setting.
Character Set Select: Set 1 (A)
ASCII Code ESC 7
Hex Code 1B 37
Dec Code 27 55
Purpose Selects hex codes 80 through 9F in the character sets as control codes. Cancels the command ESC 6.
Discussion This code overrides the control panel setting Alt. Char Set.
Character Set Select: Set 2 (B)
ASCII Code ESC 6
Hex Code 1B 36
Dec Code 27 54
Purpose Selects hex codes 80 through 9F in the character sets as printable symbols. Cancels the command ESC 7.
Discussion This control code overrides the control panel setting Alt. Char
Set. Appendix C shows the printable symbols for hex codes 80 through 9F.
129
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Condensed Print
ASCII Code SI
Hex Code 0F
ESC SI
1B 0F
Dec Code 15
Purpose
27 15
Sets condensed print.
Discussion If the emulation is set at 5 cpi, it is changed to 8.55 cpi.
If the emulation is set at 10 cpi, it is changed to 17.1 cpi.
If the emulation is set at 12 cpi, it is changed to 20 cpi.
If the emulation is set at NLQ 12 cpi, it is changed to 17.1 cpi.
You may enable/disable condensed print using the control panel; the default is Enable. Once you enable condensed print using the control panel, this control code sets condensed print to enabled until it is canceled by control code DC2, a printer reset, or a new print mode (ESC I) control code.
Example The following sample shows condensed character printing and reset.
Condensed Print, Cancel
ASCII Code DC2
Hex Code 12
Dec Code 18
ESC DC2
1B 12
27 18
Purpose Cancels condensed character printing and sets pitch to 10 cpi.
Discussion The Condensed Print Cancel command sets the character pitch to 10 cpi, or 5 cpi if printing is set for double wide.
Example See the SI control code above for an example of Condensed
Print Cancel.
130
Deselect Printer
Deselect Printer
ASCII Code ESC Q 22
Hex Code 1B 51 16
Dec Code 27 81 22
Purpose Stops the printer from processing data received from the host computer.
Discussion This code is for diagnostic use; it instructs the printer to stop processing data received from the host system. In order to resume processing data, the printer must be reset from the host system.
Double Wide Print
ASCII Code ESC W n
Hex Code 1B 57 n
Dec Code 27 87 n
Purpose Selects or cancels double wide (expanded) print.
where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).
If n = 1, 3, 5 ... (any odd value), double wide print is selected.
If n = 0, 2, 4 ... (any even value), double wide print is cancelled.
Discussion An ESC W code sets or cancels double wide print, as follows:
When expanded print using ESC W is received, all characters print double wide until cancelled by an even parameter hex code.
Double wide print can also be set via the command SO and ESC
SO, double wide print for one line only. An ESC W code overrides these settings.
Example The following sample illustrates expanded character printing and expanded character printing reset.
131
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Double Wide Print (One Line Only)
ASCII Code SO
Hex Code 0E
ESC SO
1B 0E
Dec Code 14
Purpose
27 14
Selects double wide print for one line only.
Discussion This expanded print command is a line-by-line print attribute; when the SO or ESC SO command is received, the current line will be printed double wide and automatically reset. This command can be reset by a paper motion command (FF, LF,
VT, CR), by the DC4 (double wide cancel) code, CAN or ESC W
(double wide print).
Example The following sample illustrates Expanded Print for one line only.
Double Wide Print (One Line Only) Cancel
ASCII Code DC4
Hex Code 14
Dec Code 20
ESC DC4
1B 14
27 20
Purpose Cancels double wide print, if it was set by command SO.
Discussion The DC4 code cancels Double Wide Print command SO. If
Double Wide Print is not enabled, the DC4 code is ignored. A
DC4 code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately.
132
Emphasized Print
Emphasized Print
ASCII Code ESC E
Hex Code 1B 45
Dec Code 27 69
Purpose Selects emphasized character print format.
Discussion When the emphasized print command is received, all characters will be printed in emphasized (bold) print until reset by the
Emphasized Print Reset command or printer reset. Emphasized print reduces the current print speed.
Note The ESC G (page 127) and ESC E commands are equivalent; they produce the same print effect.
Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing.
Emphasized Print, Cancel
ASCII Code ESC F
Hex Code 1B 46
Dec Code 27 70
Purpose Cancels emphasized character printing.
Discussion The emphasized print reset command only resets the emphasized print character attribute. See Example for using
ESC E combined with ESC F.
133
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Form Feed
ASCII Code FF
Hex Code 0C
Dec Code 12
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, advances the paper to the next topof-form, and moves the logical printhead to the first character column.
Discussion Forms length is set by using the control panel or forms length control codes. This code cancels double wide (expanded) characters if set by the SO command. The Form Feed command will react differently when the VFU is active. Refer to Chapter 7 in this manual for further information. The Form Feed command will react differently when the control panel selection “FF Valid at
TOF” is disabled. Refer to the User’s Guide for further information.
Forms Length Set in Inches
ASCII Code ESC C NUL n
Hex Code 1B 43 00 n
Dec Code 27 67 0 n
Purpose Sets the length of forms (paper) in inches.
where n = whole numbers from 1 through 21 to specify the number of inches on a page. (All larger values are ignored.)
Discussion Upon receipt of this code, the current line becomes the first line of the form, and the forms length set becomes the current forms length. Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the form are ignored; in addition, once a new forms length is set the bottom margin is set to zero.
Line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command. If the forms length is set smaller than the line spacing, a form feed advances the paper position to the next top-of-form position.
Forms length in inches can also be set at the control panel via the LinePrinter+ Form Length menu option (refer to the User’s
Guide ). However, this host control code overrides the control panel setting.
134
Forms Length Set in Lines
Forms Length Set in Lines
ASCII Code ESC C n
Hex Code 1B 43 n
Dec Code 27 67 n
Purpose Sets the length of a form (paper) in lines.
where n = 1 through 168 (hex 01 through hex A8) to specify the number of lines per page at the current line spacing.
Discussion The forms length is defined in inches as the quotient of n divided by the current lines per inch (lpi) setting. Once the forms length has been set, subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command.
If the forms length is set smaller than the line spacing, a form feed advances the paper position to the next top-of-form position.
If the forms length derived from the quotient of n lines divided by lines per inch is not an exact multiple of the printer dot resolution, the value is adjusted down until the forms length and dot resolution distance match.
Forms length can also be set at the control panel via the
LinePrinter+ Form Length menu option (refer to the User’s
Guide ). However, this host control code overrides the control panel setting.
135
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Initialize Parameters
ASCII Code ESC [ K n1 NUL n2 n3 n4 n5
Hex Code 1B 5B 4B n1 00 n2 n3 n4 n5
Dec Code 27 91 75 n1 0 n2 n3 n4 n5
Purpose Sets the printer’s initial condition.
Discussion This command causes the printer to reset and defines the configuration that will be loaded to the printer during the reset.
Several variables must be specified to define the load configuration, as described below.
Note An ESC[K code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately. All numerical parameters are in the hex 00 through FF range unless stated otherwise.
Only specified parameters are supported. Other values may be ignored or cause unpredictable results, and should be avoided.
n1
The value of n1 defines which of the following n bytes will be included in the command line, as shown in Table 29.
Table 29. n1 Values n1 Hex Value
1
3
4
Function
One byte follows ( n2 )
Three bytes follow ( n2, n3 and n4 )
Four bytes follow ( n2, n3, n4 and n5 )
Note Specifying any value for n1 other than 1, 3, or 4 may cause unpredictable results, and should be avoided.
n2
The 2-digit hexadecimal value for n2 defines the load configuration for the printer. The Proprinter III XL supports six values for this parameter: 00, 01, 04,
05, 254, and 255 (hex 00, 01, 04, 05, FE, and FF). Any other value will be ignored.
If any of the six supported values is entered for the n2 parameter, then the printer will reset to the factory default configuration. Configuration parameters defined by command bytes n4 and n5 , if present, will override conflicting factory default values.
136
Initialize Parameters
n3
Parameter n3 is provided for compatibility with the Proprinter III XL printer control language standard. You may define any value for this parameter. (For
Proprinters, this bit must define the attached printer as either Proprinter, value
03, or Proprinter III XL, value 22 [hex 16].)
n4 and n5
Parameter bytes n4 and n5 allow you to define several configuration parameters that will override conflicting factory default and memory-based configuration values when the printer is reinitialized. Possible values for n4 and n5 are listed in Table 30 and Table 31, respectively.
Note In addition to the formatting from bytes n4 and n5 , this command sets the current line as top-of-form. It also clears vertical tabs and sets the horizontal tabs at every eight columns, starting at column 9.
n4 Bit
5
4
7
6
Function
Process this byte
Reserved n/a
Line Feed =
Table 30. n4 Values
OFF (0)
Process
Reserved n/a
LF
3
2
1
0
Carriage Return =
Set forms length
Slashed Zero
Character set
CR
11 inches
Disable
1 (A)
ON (1)
Ignore
Reserved n/a
LF + CR
(add CR with each LF)
CR + LF
(add LF with each CR)
12 inches
Enable
2 (B)
137
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
1
0
3
2 n5 Bit
7
6
5
4
Function
Process this byte
Code page
Unidirectional
Printing
12 cpi compressed to 20 n/a
Form feed at TOF
Print Width
Sheet feeder
Table 31. n5 Values
OFF (0)
Process
437
Bidirectional
20 n/a
Enable
13.2 inches n/a
ON (1)
Ignore
850
Unidirectional
12 n/a
Ignore
8 inches n/a
Line Feed
ASCII Code LF
Hex Code 0A
Dec Code 10
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer (if any) and advances the paper one line at the current line space setting.
Discussion If configured for LF equals new line (LF = CR + LF), the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line.
Otherwise, the logical print head does not move when configured for LF function only (LF = LF only). The LF function cancels double wide (expanded) characters if set by the SO command.
Line feed can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately.
138
Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only)
Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only)
ASCII Code ESC J n
Hex Code 1B 4A n
Dec Code 27 74 n
Purpose Advances the vertical character position only.
n /216 inch for one line where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF).
Discussion The n /216-inch line feed control code is effective for one line only. All single-line-only print attributes are canceled.
If the emulation is configured for LF equals newline
(LF=CR+LF), the paper advances one line at the n line spacing setting and the logical print head is positioned at character column 1.
The paper position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is added to the next paper motion command.
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines. Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated
(Double High), Superscript, or Subscript characters are used on the same line. Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.
Example The following example illustrates n /216-inch line spacing.
139
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)
ASCII Code ESC 0
Hex Code 1B 30
Dec Code 27 48
Purpose Specifies continuous line spacing at 1/8-inch increments (8 lpi).
Discussion When the 1/8-inch line spacing control code is received, all lines will be printed at 8 lpi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset.
Example The following example illustrates 1/8-inch line spacing.
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (10.3 lpi)
ASCII Code ESC 1
Hex Code 1B 31
Dec Code 27 49
Purpose Specifies the line spacing at 7/72-inch (10.3 lpi) increments.
Discussion When the 7/72-inch line spacing control code is received, all lines will be printed at the 7/72-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting, and the message display will reflect the line spacing as
10.3 lines per inch.
Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),
Superscript, or Subscript; overlapping lines may occur.
Example The following example illustrates 7/72-inch line spacing.
140
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Executes)
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Executes)
ASCII Code ESC 2
Hex Code 1B 32
Dec Code 27 50
Purpose ESC 2 sets line spacing to 6 lpi or as set by ESC A.
Discussion ESC 2 asserts n /72-inch line spacing as set by ESC A (page
142). If no distance has been set by ESC A, the distance is 1/6 inch.
The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting.
Example The following example illustrates 1/6-inch line spacing and assumes that a distance has not been set by ESC A.
141
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Storage)
ASCII Code ESC A n
Hex Code 1B 41 n
Dec Code 27 65 n
Purpose Stores a line spacing of n /72-inch increments.
where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF).
All others values are ignored.
Discussion This control code stores a value for line spacing of n /72 inch.
The ESC 2 control code (described on page 141) executes the line spacing stored by the preceding ESC A, until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. A control code line spacing overrides a control panel line spacing setting. (The control panel display shows line spacing in lines per inch.)
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines. Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated
(Double High), Superscript, or Subscript characters are used on the same line. Common values of n are listed in Table 32.
Table 32. Line Spacing values n
24
18
12
9
8
6
Line Spacing
3 lpi
4 lpi
6 lpi
8 lpi
9 lpi
12 lpi
Example The following example illustrates 20/72-inch line spacing.
142
Line Spacing n/216 Inch
Line Spacing n/216 Inch
ASCII Code ESC 3 n
Hex Code 1B 33 n
Dec Code 27 51 n
Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n /216-inch increments.
where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF).
Discussion When the n /216-inch line spacing control code is received, all line feeds following will be at n /216-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. The control code line spacing selection will override the control panel line spacing setting.
The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is added to the next paper motion command.
Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),
Superscript, or Subscript; overlapping lines may occur.
Example The following example illustrates n /216-inch line spacing.
143
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Margin, Bottom
ASCII Code ESC N n
Hex Code 1B 4E n
Dec Code 27 78 n
Purpose Sets the bottom margin.
Discussion n defines the number of lines above the bottom of the form to set as the bottom margin. n has a range from 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF). The actual margin in inches is the quotient of n divided by the current lines per inch (lpi).
If a line feed command causes the active position to advance below the bottom margin, the paper advances to the top of the next form. If the bottom margin set is equal to or greater than the form length, printing is only allowed on the top line of each page.
If the forms length is changed by the ESC C code (Forms Length sequence), the bottom margin is set to zero.
The bottom margin setting can also be selected from the control panel; however, the host control code will override the control panel setting. Any vertical tabs set within the bottom margin zone will be ignored.
Margin Cancel, Bottom
ASCII Code ESC O
Hex Code 1B 4F
Dec Code 27 79
Purpose Resets the bottom margin to zero.
Margins, Horizontal
ASCII Code ESC X n m
Hex Code 1B 58 n m
Dec Code 27 88 n m
Purpose where
Sets left and right margins in character positions.
n = left margin position m = right margin position
Discussion The values of n and m must be in the range from 0 through 255
(hex 00 through hex FF). The margins are measured in character positions at the current characters per inch (cpi). n is the column number from the left edge of the paper. For example, n = 5 means that the line starts at column number 5.
Therefore it has a left margin of 4.
m is the column number from the right edge of the paper. For example, m = 56 means that the line ends on column 80 if the form width is 136.
144
Overscoring
Overscoring
ASCII Code ESC _ n
Hex Code 1B 5F n
Dec Code 27 95 n
Purpose Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all characters.
where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).
n = 0, 2, 4... disables automatic overscoring (any even value from hex 00 through hex FE) n = 1, 3, 5... enables automatic overscoring (any odd value from hex 01 through hex FF)
Discussion When automatic overscore is enabled, all characters, including spaces, are overscored. Full-height graphics characters are not overscored.
Example The following sample illustrates automatic overscoring and overscoring reset.
Print All Characters
ASCII Code ESC \ n1 n2
Hex Code 1B 5C n1 n2
Dec Code 27 92 n1 n2
Purpose where
Prints the characters assigned to code points as characters, rather than interpreting the code values as commands.
n1 + 256 n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256
(quotient of division)
Discussion The number of data bytes specified by n1 + 256 n2 will print as text. Valid numerical parameters are in the range 0 through 255
(hex 00 through hex FF). Data values that do not correspond to standard ASCII codes will print as spaces.
145
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Print Next Character
ASCII Code ESC ^ n
Hex Code 1B 5E n
Dec Code 27 94 n
Purpose Prints the graphic character assigned to n , rather than interpreting the code value as a command.
Discussion This command may appear anywhere in the data stream, and will be acted upon immediately. Valid numerical parameters are in the range 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).
Print Mode
ASCII Code ESC I n (uppercase “i”)
Hex Code 1B 49 n
Dec Code 27 73 n
Purpose Selects a print mode.
Discussion This control code selects a print mode from among the choices listed in Table 33.
Table 33. Print Mode Values n Hex
04
05
06
07
00
01
02
03
0B
0F
Function
DP 10 cpi
HS 12 cpi
NLQ Sans Serif 10 cpi
NLQ 10 cpi
DP 10 cpi
HS 12 cpi
NLQ Sans Serif 10 cpi
NLQ 10 cpi
NLQ Italic Proportional
NLQ Italic 10 cpi
Note
There are several duplicate function values that select the same print quality. These are provided for compatibility with the
Proprinter III XL standard.
If you specify any value other than the ones shown in Table
33, unpredictable results may occur.
146
Print Quality
Print Quality
ASCII Code ESC x n
Hex Code 1B 78 n
Dec Code 27 120 n
Purpose This code selects a print quality.
where n = 0 or 48 (hex 00 or hex 30) selects DP print quality n = 1 or 49 (hex 01 or hex 31) selects NLQ print quality n = 2 or 50 (hex 02 or hex 32) selects HS print quality n = 3 or 51 (hex 03 or hex 33) selects OCR A print quality n = 4 or 52 (hex 04 or hex 34) selects OCR B print quality
Comment When you select NLQ, the font is serif. Print qualities selected with this command override control panel selections. Selecting an OCR print quality overrides any character attributes already set, such as condensed, double-wide, etc. These attributes will not return when another print quality is set. Character attributes set when OCR is selected will be ignored.
Proportional Spacing
ASCII Code ESC P n
Hex Code 1B 50 n
Dec Code 27 80 n
Purpose where
Enables/disables proportional spacing of characters.
n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF). n = 1, 3, 5...(any odd value) enables proportional spacing n = 0, 2, 4...(any even value) disables proportional spacing
Comment This command is ignored when a non-proportional font is used.
147
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Select Attributes
ASCII Code ESC [ @ n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3
Hex Code 1B 5B 40 n1 00 00 00 n2 n3
Dec Code 27 91 64 n1 0 0 0 n2 n3
Purpose Selects double high and double wide attributes, and single or double high line spacing.
Discussion Parameter n1 selects the attributes from n2 and n3 , as follows:
Table 34. Select Attributes n1 Values n1 (Hex)
03
04
Function
Set character height and line feed settings according to the value of n2 . (If n1 = 03, there is no n3 ).
Set character height, line feed, and character settings according to the values of n2 and n3 .
n2 (Hex)
11
12
20
21
22
00
01
02
10
Parameter n2 defines the height attributes, as follows:
Table 35. Select Attributes n2 Values
Function
No change
Set single height characters
Set double height characters
Set single line spacing
Set single height characters and single line spacing
Set double high characters and single line spacing
Set double line spacing
Set single height characters and double line spacing
Set double high characters and double line spacing
148
Set Top-of-Form n3 (Hex)
00
01
02
Parameter n3 defines the width attributes, as follows:
Table 36. Select Attributes n3 Values
Function
No change
Set single wide characters
Set double wide characters
An ESC [ @ code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately.
All numerical parameters are in the hex 00 through FF range unless stated otherwise.
Set Top-of-Form
ASCII Code ESC 4
Hex Code 1B 34
Dec Code 27 52
Purpose Sets the current paper position as the top-of-form.
149
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Superscript/Subscript Printing
ASCII Code ESC S n
Hex Code 1B 53 n
Dec Code 27 83 n
Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing.
where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).
n = 1, 3, 5 (any odd value), selects subscript printing.
n = 0, 2, 4 (any even value), selects superscript printing.
Discussion When the super/subscript command is received, all characters will be superscript or subscript until reset by the super/subscript reset command or printer reset. Super/subscript print modes are not available for the double high attribute.
You can print both superscript and subscript characters in the same character column by using the Backspace (BS) control code, but these characters will not print when double high printing is in effect.
Note Superscript and subscript characters print at the same size as the current font, shifted up or down relative to the print line.
Example The following sample illustrates superscript/subscript printing.
Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel
ASCII Code ESC T
Hex Code 1B 54
Dec Code 27 84
Purpose Cancels superscript and subscript printing (as set by ESC S).
This code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately.
150
Tab, Horizontal
Tab, Horizontal
ASCII Code HT
Hex Code 09
Dec Code 09
Purpose Moves the logical printhead right to the next horizontal tab stop.
Discussion Power-on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth character starting at position 9 (9, 17, 25). If there are no horizontal tabs set or the logical printhead is located at the last character column, the code is ignored and no movement occurs.
If double-wide, double-high attributes are enabled, single-wide character spacing is used. Horizontal tabs are stored as a relative position; therefore, character pitch changes will change horizontal tab positions. Refer to the ESC D control code description (page 151) to set new tab positions.
Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal
ASCII Code ESC D n1 n2...nk NUL
Hex Code 1B 44 n1 n2...nk 00
Dec Code 27 68 n1 n2...nk 0
Purpose Sets up to 28 horizontal tab positions.
Discussion n1, n2, up to nk denote character column positions for tab stops
(at the current character pitch), where n1 and n2 represent the first two tab stops and nk is the final tab stop. You may specify from 1 up to 28 tab stops (all parameters after 28 are ignored).
The leftmost character column position is 1. The value for each tab stop can range from 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF), inclusive, and all tabs must be specified in ascending order. Any out-of-order symbols are ignored, though the remainder of the sequence is processed.
If you are defining a sequence of tabs, terminate the string with a
00H ( not an ESC D 00H). If you want every column to be set with a horizontal tab, use ESC D 00H. If only one tab position is set and it is beyond the right margin, then every column is also set as a horizontal tab. Any change in character pitch within a line changes the tab positions for the entire line. All control codes that define horizontal distance expressed in units of characters are stored internally in character columns.
Example The following example illustrates horizontal tab setting and accessing.
151
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Tab, Vertical
ASCII Code VT
Hex Code 0B
Dec Code 11
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the next vertical tab position.
Discussion In the Proprinter III XL emulation, vertical tab positions are set by control code ESC B and executed by control code VT. In this mode, if vertical tabs are loaded, the paper position moves to the next vertical tab position.
If a vertical tab format is not defined, the paper position is advanced to the next line at the current line spacing. If a vertical tab format is defined but no vertical tab positions are set between the current print position and the end of the form, the paper position is advanced to the top of the next form. The VT code resets all single line print attributes. More information on vertical tabs is provided in the Chapter 7.
If configured for LF = CR + LF (LF equals new line), the character position indicator is positioned at character column 1 of the new line. Otherwise, the character position indicator does not move.
152
Tab Set/Clear, Vertical
Tab Set/Clear, Vertical
ASCII Code ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL
Hex Code 1B 42 n1 n2 ... nk 00
Dec Code 27 66 n1 n2 ... nk 0
Purpose Sets or clears vertical tab positions.
Discussion The physical position on the paper is defined by n and the current line spacing.
where n = vertical tab setting (in lines), and k = number of tabs possible.
The value of n can be defined in the range of 1 through 255 (hex
01 through hex FF), inclusive, while k is defined in the range of 1 through 64 (hex 01 through 40). Any value for k over 64 is ignored. Subsequent line spacing changes affect the tab position. If the value of n exceeds the forms length, that tab position is ignored.
Vertical tab positions are set by the command ESC B and executed by the command VT. The tab positions must be in ascending order, or the emulation ignores the out-of-order symbols. If the ESC B command is followed immediately by hex
00, the vertical tab positions are cleared.
Example The following sample illustrates Vertical Tab Setting. To run the sample, set your printer at top-of-form.
Tabs, Clear All (Return to default)
ASCII Code ESC R
Hex Code 1B 52
Dec Code 27 82
Purpose Clears all horizontal and vertical tab stops.
Discussion When ESC R is invoked, horizontal tab stops reinitialize to every eight columns, starting at column 9 (9, 17, 25). In addition, the vertical tabs are cleared.
153
Chapter 4 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
Underline
ASCII Code ESC - n
Hex Code 1B 2D n
Dec Code 27 45 n
Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters.
Discussion When automatic underline is enabled, all characters, including spaces, are underlined until disabled.
where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF).
n = 1, 3, 5 (any odd value) selects underlining.
n = 0, 2, 4 (any even value) cancels underlining.
Example The following sample illustrates automatic underlining and underlining reset.
Unidirectional Printing
ASCII Code ESC U n
Hex Code 1B 55 n
Dec Code 27 85 n
Purpose Sets or cancels unidirectional printing. While this feature reduces print speed by 1/2, the increased print quality will improve the readability of barcodes and graphics.
Discussion This code sets or cancels unidirectional printing, as follows: where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).
n = 1, 3, 5 (any odd value) selects unidirectional text printing.
n = 0, 2, 4 (any even value) cancels unidirectional text printing.
154
5
Epson FX-1050 Emulation
Overview
This chapter describes the Epson FX emulation host control codes.
“Emulation” refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language. A printer control language is the coding system used to convey, manipulate, and print data. It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation. In this manual, the terms emulation, printer protocol, and printer control language are synonymous.
In Epson FX emulation mode, your printer can print files coded for the Epson
FX printer control language. To select the Epson FX emulation as the active printer emulation, select LinePrinter Plus from the EMULATION menu and
Epson FX from the Printer Protocol menu, as described in the User’s Guide.
The Epson FX emulation provides many configurable parameters. The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 37. You can modify these parameter values in two ways:
• The Epson FX host control codes. An extensive set of Epson FX control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream. Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the Epson FX control code commands.
• The printer configuration menus. You can modify a subset of the
Epson FX emulation parameters using the control panel switches and
LCD display, as described in the User’s Guide.
A parameter value set by a host control code generally overrides a value set from the printer’s control panel.
Note Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer’s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory defaults. The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User’s Guide.
155
Chapter 5 Overview
Epson FX-1050 Default Values and States
The factory settings for the Epson FX-1050 emulation menu options are shown in Table 37. Table 38 lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the LinePrinter+ formatting menus. (The EMULATION menu options are described in the User’s Guide ). Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options.
Table 37. Epson Emulation Menu Option Factory Settings
Characteristic
Define CR Code
Auto LF
Define LF Code
Printer Select
Character Set
20 CPI Condensed
Alt. Set 80-9F
Default Setting
CR = CR
Enable
LF = LF
Disable
Epson Set
Enable
Control Code
156
Epson FX-1050 Default Values and States
Table 38. LinePrinter+ Menu Option Factory Settings
Characteristic
CPI
LPI
Typeface
Proportional Spacing
Bold Print
Italic Print
Slashed Zero
Left Margin
Right Margin
Bottom Margin
Perforation Skip
Form Length
Form Width
Default Setting
10.0
6.0
Data Processing
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
0 columns
0 columns
0 lines
Disable
11.0 inches
279.4 millimeters
66 lines
13.6 inches
345.4 millimeters
136 characters
157
Chapter 5 Overview
Epson Emulation Exceptions and Differences
Because of mechanical differences between your line matrix printer and
Epson printers (moving printhead serial matrix printers), some Epson features are approximated or not supported.
• Epson codes that produce different behavior in your printer are indicated by a “dagger” ( † ) in the Control Code Index.
• The Epson emulation supports the following fonts: DP, NLQ Serif and
Sans Serif, Draft with 10 cpi, 12 cpi and 15 cpi in either condensed or normal widths, and OCR A and OCR B in 10 cpi. Condensed printing at
10 cpi in DP quality maps to 17.1 cpi. Character pitches other than 10 DP cpi map to 20 cpi in DP and 17.1 cpi in NLQ.
• Epson bit-image graphics are supported, including all plotter and CRT densities.
• Many character sets are available, including IBM-PC Graphics (IBM Code
Page 0437) and Epson. You can configure the zero character to contain a slash or no slash.
• The Double Wide print control codes (ESC W, SO) double character width, but not inter-character spacing, unlike the Epson FX-1050. The formulas for total character spacing are as follows:
Epson FX-1050 2 (char + 1 dot + space)
Epson Emulation 2 (char + 1 dot) + space
• The Condensed Print (SI) control code condenses character width but not inter-character spacing, unlike the Epson FX-1050 which condenses both character width and spacing.
• If one or more Backspace control codes follow directly after a Bit Image
Graphics command (ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, or ESC Z), the printer will backspace into the graphic pattern, the number of dots depending on the current cpi setting. For an Epson FX-1050 printer, one Backspace will send the logical printhead directly to the beginning of the graphics pattern.
• When backspacing over proportionally spaced characters, Epson printers move back the width of each proportional character; this emulation moves back based on the current cpi setting, as if proportional spacing is disabled.
158
Epson Character Sets
Epson Character Sets
BEL Ä
BS CAN
HT
LF
Ü
ä
VT ESC
FF ü
CR
SO
SI
É
é
¥
°
£
ò
ì
è
ù
0
à
DC3
DC4
ø
¨
1
§
ß
DC2
D
E
B
C
F
9
A
7
8
5
6
3
4
Hex
0
1
2
–
.
+
’
/
)
*
‘
(
%
&
#
$
"
!
2
SP
=
>
;
<
?
9
:
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
3
0
Epson printers use five character sets. The IBM PC code page, OCR A, OCR
B, and an extensive array of print language sets may be selected from the configuration menus. In addition, there is a unique Epson character set. The
Epson character set (shown in Table 39) is the ASCII character set with the upper, non-ASCII set defined as italics, and the usually unprintable codes designated as international characters.
Table 39. Epson Character Set
M
N
K
L
O
I
J
G
H
E
F
C
D
A
B
4
@
]
^
\
[
_
Y
Z
W
X
U
V
S
T
Q
R
5
P m n k l o j i g h e f c d a b
6
‘
}
~
{
|
DEL y z w x u v s t q r
7 p
Å
å
¤
P t
Ç
Ñ
ñ i
¿
°
£
ì
ò
è
ù
8
à
É
é
ö
ü
¥
Ü
ä
Ä
Ö
æ
ø
ø
¨
ß
Æ
9
§
–
.
+
,
/
)
*
(
’
%
&
#
$
"
!
A
SP
=
>
;
<
?
9
:
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
B
0
M
N
K
L
O
I
J
G
H
E
F
C
D
A
B
C
@
]
^
\
[
_
Y
Z
W
X
U
V
S
T
Q
R
D
P m n k l o j i g h f e c d a b
E
‘
}
~
|
{
ø y z w x u v t s q r
F p
The international characters in hex 00-1F and hex 80-9F can be printed when you invoke control code ESC I 1 (see page 173). You may use the Epson configuration menus described in the User’s Guide (or the ESC R control code) to select an international character set.
Normally, these characters are either blank or control codes. The implementation is that the control codes hide the non-italic international characters, even in hex 00 through 1F, and DEL. DEL conceals the non-italic slashed zero.
159
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control
Codes
The remainder of this chapter describes the Epson printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer, in order to invoke and configure numerous Epson emulation functions.
Format for Control Code Descriptions
The following information is listed for each control code (where applicable):
Name The title or function of the command.
ASCII Code The ASCII mnemonic for the command is shown. Command sequences are in 7-bit (ASCII) form.
Hex Code The code or command sequence in hexadecimal numbers.
Dec Code The code or command sequence in decimal numbers.
Purpose The function(s) of the control code.
Discussion A discussion of the uses of the code or command sequence, including a description of exceptions or limitations to normal use.
Example A sample is provided when it is possible to illustrate the effect of a control code or if a specific syntax is required.
† (“dagger”) This symbol means the code produces non-Epson behavior in your printer.
Note If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description, unpredictable results may occur.
Escape Sequences
An Epson control code consisting of more than one character is called an escape sequence because the first character in the sequence is always the
ASCII ESCape character. ESC alerts the printer that a special function command (not printable characters) follows.
The format for an Epson escape sequence is:
(ESC)(parameter 1)(parameter 2)...(parameter n )
For example, to select emphasized (offset) print, send the ESC character immediately followed by the E character (do not add a space character):
ASCII: ESC E Hex: 1B 45
160
Attribute Set and Reset Codes
Attribute Set and Reset Codes
Set and reset are another way of saying turn on and turn off, select and deselect, or enable and disable.
Some printer features are set and reset with an escape sequence and the numbers 1 or 0. In such cases you can represent 1 and 0 as hexadecimal codes 01 and 00, or as the ASCII codes for the numerals 1 and 0
(hexadecimal 31 and 30).
NUL Code
NUL (Hex 00) is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character; however, it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space character. NUL can also be used as a parameter terminator for the Set
Horizontal Tabs (page 179) or Set Vertical Tabs multibyte control code (page
200).
Note Hex 80 in the 0437 PC Character Set and hex 7F in the
0850 PC Character Set are treated as a NUL; however, these two controls can not be used as parameter terminators.
Switching Between the Emulations
The printer supports several different emulations. PCL-II is the default. P-
Series, Proprinter III XL, and Epson FX-1050 are all a part of the LinePrinter
Plus emulation.
The following command switches from PCL-II to Epson:
ESC%-00002X
To switch from Epson to PCL-II, send the following command to the printer:
ESC|};KD
161
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
The Control Codes
The following index lists the control codes by function, ASCII mnemonic, and page number. Some control code functions can also be selected at the control panel.
† = Produces non-Epson behavior in your printer.
FUNCTION ASCII CODE
Vertical Motion and Print Execution
PAGE
Carriage Return
Form Feed
Line Feed
Line Feed n /216 Inch
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch
Line Spacing
Line Spacing n /216 Inch n /72 Inch
† Paper Out Detection, Enable
† Paper Out Detection, Disable
Select Vertical Tab Channel
Set Form Length in Inches
Set Form Length in Lines
Horizontal Motion
CR
FF
LF
ESC J n
ESC 2
ESC 0
ESC 1
ESC 3 n
ESC A n
ESC 9
ESC 8
ESC / c
ESC C NUL n
ESC C n
Set Vertical Tabs in Channels ESC b c n1 n2 n3 ... n16 NUL
Skip Over Perforation ESC N
Skip Over Perforation, Cancel ESC O n
Vertical Tab, Execute
Vertical Tab Set/Clear
VT
ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL
184
186
187
192
193
194
196
197
166
175
181
181
182
182
183
183
197
200
200
† Backspace
Carriage Return
Character Pitch 10 cpi
Character Pitch 12 cpi
Horizontal Tab Execute
Horizontal Tab Set/Release
Select/Deselect Proportional
Spacing
Set Absolute Horizontal Print
Position in 1/60 Inch
Set Intercharacter Spacing
in 1/120 Inch
Set Margin, Left
Set Margin, Right
Set Relative Horizontal Print
Position in 1/120 Inch
BS
CR
ESC P
ESC M
HT
ESC D n1 ... nk NUL
ESC p
ESC $ n n1 n2
ESC SP
ESC l
ESC \ n
ESC Q n n n1 n2
165
166
166
166
179
179
191
193
195
195
195
196
162
Emphasis
† Condensed Print
Condensed Print Reset
Double High Print, Set/Reset
Double Strike
Double Strike, Cancel
† Double Wide Print
SI (or ESC SI)
DC2
ESC w
ESC G
ESC H
ESC W n n
† Double Wide Print (One Line) SO (or ESC SO)
Double Wide Print (One Line),
Cancel
Emphasized Print
Emphasized Print, Cancel
Italic Printing
Italic Printing, Cancel
† Superscript and Subscript
Printing
Superscript and Subscript
Printing, Cancel
Underline
DC4
ESC E
ESC F
ESC 4
ESC 5
ESC S
ESC T
ESC - n n
Print Quality Control
† Character Pitch 15 cpi ESC g
† Define a Download Character ESC &
† Master Print Select ESC ! n
† Remove Downloaded CharactersESC NUL n NUL
† Select Print Quality ESC x n
† Select Serif or Sans Serif Font ESC k n
† Select User-Defined Font ESC % n
Character Set Manipulation
Character Set Select:
International Languages
Enable Printing Hex Codes
00-1F and 80-9F
ESC R
ESC I n
Make Hex 80-9F Control Codes ESC 7
Make Hex 80-9F Printable ESC 6
Select Italic Character Set ESC t n n
Data Manipulation
Cancel Line
† Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data
Bytes to 0
Delete Character
Pass Bit 7 from Host
Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data
Bytes to 1
CAN
ESC =
DEL
ESC #
ESC >
The Control Codes
168
169
170
170
171
171
172
172
173
173
180
180
198
198
199
166
169
186
188
191
192
192
165
168
169
187
193
167
173
184
184
190
163
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Graphics
Graphics, Standard Density
Graphics, Double Density
Graphics, Double Density
Double Speed
ESC K
ESC L n1 n2 n1 n2
ESC Y n1 n2
Graphics, Quadruple Density ESC Z n1 n2
Reassign Graphics Mode
Select Graphics Mode
Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode
ESC ?
ESC *
ESC ^ s m m n1 n2 m n1 n2 d1 ... dk
Miscellaneous Printer Control
Bell BEL
† Cut-Sheet/Paper Feed Control ESC EM n
† Half-Speed Mode, On/Off
Initialize Printer
Printer Select
Printer Deselect
ESC s
ESC @
DC1
DC3
Unidirectional Printing, 1 Line ESC < n
Unidirectional Printing, Set/Reset ESC U n
175
176
177
178
188
189
190
165
169
178
180
187
187
199
199
164
Backspace
Backspace
ASCII Code BS
Hex Code 08
Dec Code 08
Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space toward the first character column.
Discussion Assures that the previous printable characters will be printed, then moves the logical print head one character space to the left at the current pitch setting (which includes double wide and ESC
SP). If the logical print head bumps into the left margin, it stops.
† When backspacing over proportionally spaced characters,
Epson printers move back the width of each proportional character; this emulation moves back based on the current cpi setting, as if proportional spacing is disabled.
† If one or more Backspace control codes follow directly after a Bit
Image Graphics command (ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, or ESC Z), your printer will backspace into the graphic pattern, the number of dots depending on the current cpi setting. For an Epson FX-
1050 printer, one Backspace will send the logical printhead directly to the beginning of the graphics pattern.
Example Print and backspace two character positions.
Bell
ASCII Code BEL
Hex Code 07
Dec Code 07
Purpose Sounds the printer’s buzzer/beeper.
Discussion The BEL function will sound the buzzer/beeper for 0.2 seconds upon receipt of this command.
Cancel Line
ASCII Code CAN
Hex Code 18
Dec Code 24
Purpose Clears all unprinted data from a line, but does not affect control codes.
Discussion You can use this control code to delete a line, but do so with caution to avoid possible misprinting. This control code cancels the double wide attribute set by SO. No other print attributes are affected. The logical print head goes to the print position it had after the last CR or paper motion command.
165
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Carriage Return
ASCII Code CR
Hex Code 0D
Dec Code 13
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, then returns the logical print head to the left margin.
Discussion Subsequent data are shifted 1/2 dot position to the right. A line feed will be appended if the printer is configured from the control panel for CR = CR + LF. When CR = CR + LF, this code cancels all one-line-only emphasis and font controls: double-wide from
SO and ESC SO, and unidirectional printing from ESC <.
Character Pitch 10 CPI
ASCII Code ESC P
Hex Code 1B 50
Dec Code 27 80
Purpose Sets character pitch to 10 characters per inch (cpi).
Discussion This command is normally used to cancel 12 cpi.
Character Pitch 12 CPI
ASCII Code ESC M
Hex Code 1B 4D
Dec Code 27 77
Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 characters per inch (cpi).
Discussion This command is available in all print modes except OCR A and
OCR B.
Character Pitch 15 CPI
ASCII Code ESC g
Hex Code 1B 67
Dec Code 27 103
Purpose Sets character pitch to 15 characters per inch (cpi).
† Discussion This command is not defined in Epson FX printers. It is included in this emulation for compatibility with the Okidata KX-P1180 printer. This command is available in all print modes except OCR
A and OCR B.
166
Character Set Select: International Languages
Character Set Select: International Languages
ASCII Code ESC R n
Hex Code 1B 52 n
Dec Code 27 82 n
Purpose Specifies a language overlay that prints the characters shown in
Table 40 when the specified code is invoked.
where n = 0 through 15 (hex 00 through 0E) to determine the language overlay shown in Table 40 below. Epson only defines character sets through hex C.
Table 40. Epson International Character Sets
(Hex)
If n=
International
Character Set Is:
A
B
C
D
E
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
0
1
4
USA
French
German
English (UK)
Danish I
Swedish
Italian
Spanish I
Japanese
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin American I
French Canadian
Latin American II
Hex Codes
23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E
Discussion This control code setting overrides a character set selection made at the control panel.
Example The following example illustrates international character selection using the IBM PC character set.
167
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0
ASCII Code ESC =
Hex Code 1B 3D
Dec Code 27 61
Purpose Sets the most significant bit (MSB) of all incoming data to 0.
† Discussion The MSB is bit number 7. This command only affects text and control code data. Graphics data passes through unchanged.
Some applications always set the MSB of print data to one (1), which results in italic or graphics printing in Epson printers. This command overcomes the problem.
This command does not suppress hex FF from printing.
Condensed Print
ASCII Code SI
Hex Code 0F
Dec Code 15
ESC SI
1B 0F
27 15
Purpose Condenses print pitch as close to 60% of the former character width as possible (up to 20 characters per inch).
Discussion The condensed print command affects all subsequent characters. After the printer receives code SI, all characters are printed condensed (approximately 60 per cent of the width of normal characters) until the printer is reset by ESC M, ESC P,
DC2, a printer reset, or a new print mode control code. SI code
(hex 0F) is equivalent to the ESC SI code. If condensed print is not allowed in the current font, this code is ignored.
Proportionally spaced text cannot be condensed. Proportional spacing overrides condensed printing.
When condensed print is selected, the following character pitches go into effect:
• DP 10 cpi condenses to DP 17.1 cpi. NLQ 10, 12, and 15 cpi condense to
NLQ 17.1 cpi. Draft 10 cpi condenses to Draft 17.1 cpi.
• DP 12 and 15 cpi condense to DP 20. Draft 12 and 15 cpi condense to
Draft 20.
† This control code condenses character width but not intercharacter spacing. An actual Epson FX-1050 printer condenses both character width and spacing. If Condensed Print is combined with Double High (ESC w) printing, only Double High printing will occur.
Example This sample shows condensed character printing and reset.
168
Condensed Print Reset
Condensed Print Reset
ASCII Code DC2
Hex Code 12
Dec Code 18
Purpose Cancels the condensed print mode set by SI, ESC SI, or the control panel.
Discussion This returns the printer to the font that was active before condensed print occurred. Other print attributes are not affected.
Example See the Condensed Print control code (page 168) for an example of Condensed Print Reset.
Cut-Sheet / Paper Feed Control
ASCII Code ESC EM n
Hex Code 1B 19 n
Dec Code 27 25 n
Purpose This code controls the paper feed mechanism on Epson printers.
† Discussion The printer ignores this command.
Define a Download Character
ASCII Code ESC &
Hex Code 1B 26
Dec Code 27 38
Purpose Defines a download character.
† Discussion The printer ignores this command and removes all downloaded font data from the data stream.
Delete Character
ASCII Code DEL
Hex Code 7F
Dec Code 127
Purpose Deletes the previous character on a line.
Discussion This command is ignored if it occurs immediately after a CR or a paper motion command. Characters truncated due to line length restrictions are not affected by this code.
169
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Double High Print, Set/Reset
ASCII Code ESC w n
Hex Code 1B 77 n
Dec Code 27 119 n
Purpose Turns double-high character printing on and off. Double-high characters are standard width but twice as high.
where n = 1 or 49 (hex 01 or hex 31) turns double high printing on n = 0 or 48 (hex 00 or hex 30) turns double high printing off
Discussion The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double high.
Note It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage
Returns when double-high character printing is on (after an
ESC w control code has been sent), or else the printer will overstrike text that has already printed.
If Superscript/Subscript (ESC S) or Condensed Print (SI) is combined with Double High printing, only Double High printing will occur.
Example The following sample illustrates double-high character printing.
Double Strike
ASCII Code ESC G
Hex Code 1B 47
Dec Code 27 71
Purpose Makes text bolder by double printing each dot twice.
Discussion This command makes text bolder by printing each dot twice, the second dot offset to the right of the first by a distance equal to
1/2 the width of a dot, the same as with ESC E.
Example The following sample illustrates double strike character printing.
170
Double Strike, Cancel
Double Strike, Cancel
ASCII Code ESC H
Hex Code 1B 48
Dec Code 27 72
Purpose Turns off the double strike printing set by ESC G or ESC !.
Discussion This control code resets only the double strike print attribute.
Other print attributes, such as double wide printing, are not affected.
Double Wide Print
ASCII Code ESC W n
Hex Code 1B 57 n
Dec Code 27 87 n
Purpose Turns double wide print on and off.
where n = 1 or 49 (hex 01 or hex 31) turns double wide print on n = 0 or 48 (hex 00 or hex 30) turns double wide print off
Discussion When ESC W is received, all characters are printed twice as wide until reset. This command overrides SO, ESC SO, and
DC4. The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double wide.
† This control code doubles character width, but does not double inter-character spacing, unlike the Epson FX-1050. The formulas for total character spacing are as follows:
Epson FX-1050 2(char + 1 dot + space)
Epson Emulation 2(char + 1 dot) + space
Example The following sample illustrates double wide character printing.
171
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Double Wide Print (One Line)
ASCII Code SO
Hex Code 0E
ESC SO
1B 0E
Dec Code 14
Purpose
27 14
Selects double wide print for one line only.
Discussion This control code is a line-by-line print attribute; when SO or
ESC SO is received, the characters on the current line print twice as wide, then automatically reset.
This control code is cancelled by the DC4 code or by a CR code, as in the Epson FX-1050. It is also cancelled by a paper motion control code (LF, VT, etc.), as in the IBM Proprinter III XL.
† This control code doubles character width, but does not double inter-character spacing, unlike the Epson FX-1050. The formulas for total character spacing are as follows:
Epson FX-1050 2(char + 1 dot + space)
Epson Emulation 2(char + 1 dot) + space
Example The following sample illustrates double wide print for one line only.
Double Wide Print (One Line), Cancel
ASCII Code DC4
Hex Code 14
Dec Code 20
Purpose Cancels the double wide print for one line only selected by SO or
ESC SO.
Discussion This command cancels the double wide print selected by SO or
ESC SO, but does not cancel double wide printing selected by
ESC W or ESC !.
172
Emphasized Print
Emphasized Print
ASCII Code ESC E
Hex Code 1B 45
Dec Code 27 69
Purpose Selects emphasized character print format.
Discussion Emphasized print makes text bolder by printing each dot twice, the second dot offset to the right of the first by a distance equal to 1/2 the width of a dot. This command is available in both DP and NLQ modes.
Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing.
Emphasized Print, Cancel
ASCII Code ESC F
Hex Code 1B 46
Dec Code 27 70
Purpose Cancels emphasized character printing selected by ESC E or
ESC !.
Discussion This command is available in both DP and NLQ modes.
Enable Printing Hex Codes 00-1F and 80-9F
ASCII Code ESC I n (uppercase “i”)
Hex Code 1B 49 n
Dec Code 27 73 n
Purpose Permits you to print hex codes 00-1F and 80-9F.
where n = 1 allows hex codes 00-1F and 80-9F to be printable and to be used for user-defined characters.
n = 0 returns hex 00-1F and 80-9F to control codes.
Discussion The printable characters that are included in hex codes 00 through 1F and 80 through 9F are usually not printable in the default state on Epson printers. Sending ESC I 1 enables you to print characters in this range. Sending ESC I 0 returns the codes to non-printable status.
Figure 2 shows the types of characters and their addresses; it is not a sample of printer output.
173
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
B7
BITS
B6
B4 B3 B2
B5
B1
0
0
1
KEY
1 0 1 1
ESC
33
27
1B
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX
CHARACTER
B4
B8
B7
BITS
0
B6 0
B5
0
COLUMN
0
B3 B2 B1 ROW
0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 o
˘
ì
à
è
ù
ò
£
BEL
BS
HT
1
1
1
0
0
0
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
10
8
8
11
9
9
6
6
6
5
5
5
7
7
7
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
10
11
12
13
14
15
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
14
12
0 C
15
13
0 D
16
14
0 E
17
15
0 F
12
10
0 A
13
11
0 B
0
0
0
1
1
§
ß
DC2
DC3
DC4
CAN
Ü
ä
ESC
ü
é
¥
¨
ø
Ä
É
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
30
24
18
31
25
19
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
Figure 2. Epson Printable Codes (Hex 00-1F and 80-9F)
B8
B7
B6
B5
BITS
B4 B3 B2 B1
ROW
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
˘
ì
ò
o
£
¡
¿
Ñ
ñ
¤
P t
Å
å
ç
203
131
83
204
132
84
207
135
87
210
136
88
205
133
85
206
134
86
211
137
89
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
1
0
0
0
COLUMN
8
à
è
ù
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
1
0
0
1
¨
§
ß
Æ
æ
Ø
ø
Ä
Ö
Ü
ä
ö
ü
É
é
¥
9
223
147
93
224
148
94
227
151
97
230
152
98
225
149
95
226
150
96
231
153
99
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
174
Form Feed
Form Feed
ASCII Code FF
Hex Code 0C
Dec Code 12
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer, if any, then moves the paper to the top of the next form.
Discussion The logical print head moves to the left margin. This code cancels all one-line-only emphasis and font controls: doublewide from SO and ESC SO, and unidirectional printing from ESC
<.
Graphics, Standard Density
ASCII Code ESC K n1 n2
Hex Code 1B 4B n1 n2
Dec Code 27 75 n1 n2
Purpose Selects normal density bit image graphics of 60 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically.
where ( n1 + 256 n2 ) defines the number of data bytes to follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)
Note The DATA can be expressed in a CHR$(DATA) format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied, especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required.
“DATA” consist of 8-bit dot columns, with the MSB at the top, and “1” bits producing dots. For more information, refer to
Chapter 6.
Discussion You can change graphics density with the ESC ? command.
Example The following example produces a pattern of standard density bit image graphics. The 9 data-bit pattern is repeated 27 times.
Compare this example to the double density and quadruple density examples.
175
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Graphics, Double Density
ASCII Code ESC L n1 n2
Hex Code 1B 4C n1 n2
Dec Code 27 76 n1 n2
Purpose Selects double density bit image graphics of 120 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically.
where ( n1 + 256 n2 ) defines the number of data bytes to follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)
Note The DATA can be expressed in a CHR$(DATA) format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied, especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required.
“DATA” consist of 8-bit dot columns, with the MSB at the top, and “1” bits producing dots. For more information, refer to
Chapter 6.
Discussion Double density printing reduces print speed to half that of normal density printing. You can change graphics density with the ESC
? command. This feature is widely used to move the print head precisely, by printing blank dot columns.
Example The following example produces double density bit-image graphics of the pattern used in the standard density bit-image mode example. The amount of data must be doubled for double density (the data are used 54 times rather than 27).
176
Graphics, Double Density Double Speed
Graphics, Double Density Double Speed
ASCII Code ESC Y n1 n2
Hex Code 1B 59 n1 n2
Dec Code 27 89 n1 n2
Purpose Selects double density, double speed bit-image graphics of 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically.
where ( n1 + 256 n2 ) defines the number of data bytes to follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)
Note The DATA can be expressed in a CHR$(DATA) format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied, especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required.
“DATA” consist of 8-bit dot columns, with the MSB at the top, and “1” bits producing dots. For more information, refer to
Chapter 6.
Discussion This mode prints double density with no adjacent dots. It is similar to ESC L, except that if the graphics data contain horizontally adjacent dots, the data may print incorrectly. This feature is widely used to move the print head precisely, by printing blank dot columns.
Example The following example produces a double density, double speed graphic image of the pattern used in the standard density example. The amount of data must be doubled for double density (the data are used 54 times rather than 27).
177
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Graphics, Quadruple Density
ASCII Code ESC Z n1 n2
Hex Code 1B 5A n1 n2
Dec Code 27 90 n1 n2
Purpose Selects Quadruple Density Bit Image graphics of 240 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically.
where ( n1 + 256 n2 ) defines the number of data bytes to follow.
DATA = ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes.
n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)
Note The DATA can be expressed in a CHR$(DATA) format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied, especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required.
“DATA” consist of 8-bit dot columns, with the MSB at the top, and “1” bits producing dots. For more information, refer to
Chapter 6.
Discussion This mode is similar to ESC L, except that four dot columns are printed in the space normally taken by two columns. You can change graphics density with the ESC ? command.
Example The following example produces quadruple density graphics of the pattern used in the standard density example. The amount of data must be quadrupled for quadruple density (the data are used 108 times rather than 27).
Half Speed Mode, On/Off
ASCII Code ESC s n
Hex Code 1B 73 n
Dec Code 27 115 n
Purpose Reduces printer speed 50% where n = 1 or 49 (hex 00 or 30) turns half speed mode off n = 0 or 48 (hex 01 or 31) turns half speed mode on
† Discussion This is simulated in your printer by unidirectional printing.
178
Horizontal Tab Execute
Horizontal Tab Execute
ASCII Code HT
Hex Code 09
Dec Code 09
Purpose Moves the logical print head to the next horizontal tab stop.
Discussion Power-on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth character at the current character spacing. Tab positions are not affected by a change of font or character width. Blank spaces between HT stops are underlined in underline mode.
Horizontal Tab Set/Release
ASCII Code ESC D n1 ... nk NUL
Hex Code 1B 44 n1 ... nk 00
Dec Code 27 68 n1 ... nk 0
Purpose Sets up to 32 horizontal tab positions.
where n1 through n32 specify the character column of the tab positions.
CHR$(0) is the sequence terminator. ESC D 0 clears all tabs.
Discussion The values of n must be listed in ascending order or they are ignored. Tabs greater than 32 or those positioned beyond the right margin are ignored. The physical tab position is the product of n and the current cell width (1/pitch), excluding double wide.
After the tabs are set, HT moves the logical print head to the next tab stop. Sending ESC @ initializes the printer and resets the tabs to every eighth character column (which is the default).
In proportional mode, the size of 10 CPI characters determines tab positions.
Example The following example illustrates how to set horizontal tabs.
179
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Initialize Printer
ASCII Code ESC @
Hex Code 1B 40
Dec Code 27 64
Purpose Resets all print-related parameters to the power-up configuration.
Discussion Restores the power-up values and clears the print buffer of printable data on the line preceding the command. Current position is set as top-of-form.
Font, international language selection, forms length, skip-over perforation, and character pitch are reset to their power-up values.
Character-by-character and line-by-line attributes are canceled.
All channels of the vertical format unit are cleared.
This command resets the horizontal tabs to every eighth character column. Interface parameters and printer protocol selection are not affected.
Italic Printing
ASCII Code ESC 4
Hex Code 1B 34
Dec Code 27 52
Purpose Turns on italic character printing.
Discussion Character graphics (IBM graphic set hex B0 through DF and F0 through FE) cannot be italicized. Italic printing will reduce throughput.
Italic Printing, Cancel
ASCII Code ESC 5
Hex Code 1B 35
Dec Code 27 53
Purpose Turns off italic character printing.
180
Line Feed
Line Feed
ASCII Code LF
Hex Code 0A
Dec Code 10
Purpose Prints the data in the buffer (if any) and advances the vertical character position a distance of one line at the current line spacing.
Discussion The logical print head keeps the same distance from the margin.
The current line is printed and the logical printhead moves down a distance equal to the current line spacing. If there are no dots, paper moves and no printing occurs. When possible, successive line feeds are accumulated and moved at once.
This code cancels all one-line-only emphasis and font selections: double-wide from SO and ESC SO, and unidirectional printing from ESC <.
Line Feed n/216 Inch
ASCII Code ESC J n
Hex Code 1B 4A n
Dec Code 27 74 n
Purpose where
Immediately advances the paper n n /216 inch.
= 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).
Discussion n = 0 is ignored. Paper movement occurs in multiples of 3/216 inch. This command produces an immediate line feed but does not affect line spacing or produce a carriage return. Any oneline-only print attributes in effect are canceled.
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines. Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as double high, superscript, or subscript characters are used on the same line.
Example The following example illustrates n /216-inch line spacing.
181
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)
ASCII Code ESC 2
Hex Code 1B 32
Dec Code 27 50
Purpose Sets the line spacing to 1/6 inch (6 lpi) for subsequent line feeds.
Discussion The 2 is ASCII character 2, not hex 2.
When ESC 2 is received, all lines are printed at 6 lpi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset.
This control code overrides line spacing set at the control panel.
Example The following example illustrates 1/6-inch line spacing.
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)
ASCII Code ESC 0
Hex Code 1B 30
Dec Code 27 48
Purpose Sets the line spacing to 1/8 inch (8 lpi) for subsequent line feeds.
Discussion The 0 is ASCII character 0 (zero), not hex 00. When ESC 0 is received, all lines are printed at 8 lpi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. This control code overrides line spacing set at the control panel.
Example The following example illustrates 1/8-inch line spacing.
182
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch
ASCII Code ESC 1
Hex Code 1B 31
Dec Code 27 49
Purpose Sets the line spacing to 7/72 inch (10.3 lpi) for subsequent line feeds.
Discussion All lines are printed at the 7/72-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. This control code overrides line spacing set at the control panel.
Printing speed is reduced if printed lines overlap.
Example The following example illustrates 7/72-inch line spacing.
Line Spacing n/216 Inch
ASCII Code ESC 3 n
Hex Code 1B 33 n
Dec Code 27 51 n
Purpose where
Specifies the line spacing at n n /216-inch increments.
= 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF).
Discussion All line feeds following receipt of this code are at n /216 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. Line spacing set by this control code overrides line spacing setting set at the control panel.
The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing, the remainder is added to the next paper motion command.
Paper movement occurs in multiples of 3/216 only.
Use caution when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or
Subscript; overlapping lines may occur. Print speed is reduced if lines overlap.
Example The following example illustrates n /216-inch line spacing.
183
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Line Spacing n/72 Inch
ASCII Code ESC A n
Hex Code 1B 41 n
Dec Code 27 65 n
Purpose Sets a line spacing of n /72 inch for subsequent line feeds.
where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through hex FF).
Discussion When this control sequence is received, all subsequent line feeds are n /72-inch until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset. This setting overrides line spacing set at the control panel.
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines. Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated
(Double High), Superscript, or Subscript characters are used on the same line. If lines overlap, printing speed is reduced. Any values set by ESC 3 (line spacing n /216 inch) are replaced.
Example The following example illustrates 20/72-inch line spacing.
Make Hex 80-9F Control Codes
ASCII Code ESC 7
Hex Code 1B 37
Dec Code 27 55
Purpose Selects codes hex 80-9F in the character sets as control codes.
Discussion This is the default when the Epson character set is selected as the default set at the control panel.
Make Hex 80-9F Printable
ASCII Code ESC 6
Hex Code 1B 36
Dec Code 27 54
Purpose Selects codes hex 80-9F in the character sets as printable characters.
Discussion This is the default when the IBM PC character set (code page
0437) is selected as the default set at the control panel.
Figure 3 shows the hex 80-9F printable characters for the Epson character set, and for the IBM PC graphic character set.
184
Make Hex 80-9F Printable
B7
BITS
B6
B4 B3 B2
B5
B1
0
0
1
KEY
1 0 1 1
ESC
33
27
1B
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX
CHARACTER
B8
B7
B6
B5
BITS
B4 B3 B2 B1 ROW
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
0
0
0
COLUMN
8 o ˘
ì
è
à
ù
ò
£
¡
¿
Ñ
ñ
¤
Å
å
ç
203
131
83
204
132
84
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
1
0
0
1
¨
§
ß
Æ
æ
Ø
ø
Ä
Ö
Ü
ä
ö
ü
É
é
¥
9
223
147
93
224
148
94
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
225
149
95
226
150
96
227
151
97
230
152
98
231
153
99
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
B8
B7
BITS
B6
B5
B4 B3 B2 B1 ROW
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
0
0
0
COLUMN
8
203
131
83
204
132
84
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
Epson USA Character Set IBM 437 Code Page
Figure 3. Epson Printable Codes (Hex 80-9F)
1
0
0
1
9
223
147
93
224
148
94
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
225
149
95
226
150
96
227
151
97
230
152
98
231
153
99
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
185
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Master Print Select
ASCII Code ESC ! n
Hex Code 1B 21 n
Dec Code 27 33 n
Purpose Selects or changes print attributes in a single command.
where n = an 8-bit number with the bits set to specify print attributes, as shown in Table 41.
Table 41. Master Print Select Bit Values
Bit No.
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Bit = 0
10 cpi
Monospaced
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Bit = 1
† 12 cpi
† Proportional
Condensed
Emphasized
† Double Strike
Double Wide
Italic
Underlined
Discussion Emphasized is substituted for double strike. Graphics and grey scale characters are not underlined. Proportional spacing overrides condensed or 12 cpi printing if both are selected.
Paper Out Detection, Enable
ASCII Code ESC 9
Hex Code 1B 39
Dec Code 27 57
Purpose Asserts a paper out condition immediately when the end of the paper supply is sensed.
† Discussion The printer decodes and ignores this command.
186
Paper Out Detection, Disable
Paper Out Detection, Disable
ASCII Code ESC 8
Hex Code 1B 38
Dec Code 27 56
Purpose Enable printing to the end of the paper supply when a paper out condition is sensed.
† Discussion The printer decodes and ignores this command.
Pass Bit 7 from Host
ASCII Code ESC #
Hex Code 1B 23
Dec Code 27 35
Purpose Passes bit 7 (the eighth and most significant bit) whether it is 1 or 0, thereby cancelling ESC > and ESC =.
Discussion This command affects only text and control code data; bit 8 of graphics data is always passed through.
Printer Select
ASCII Code DC1
Hex Code 11
Dec Code 17
Purpose Places printer in the selected state.
Discussion The configuration parameter Printer Select must be set to
Enable. Refer to the User’s Guide for information about this menu option.
This control code allows the printer to receive and print data from the host if it was deselected by DC3. If the printer was not deselected by DC3, this code is ignored.
Printer Deselect
ASCII Code DC3
Hex Code 13
Dec Code 19
Purpose Places printer in the deselected state.
Discussion The configuration parameter Printer Select must be set to
Enable. Refer to the User’s Guide for information about this menu option.
When the printer receives this command it ignores data until a
DC1 (Printer Select) command is received.
187
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Reassign Graphics Mode
ASCII Code ESC ? s m
Hex Code 1B 3F s m
Dec Code 27 63 s m
Purpose Changes one graphics mode to another.
Discussion s is character K, L, Y, or Z, which is changed to mode m (0-7) from Table 42 (page 189). Thereafter, sending data to the bit image command makes the data print according to the graphics mode you select with m.
Remove Downloaded Characters
ASCII Code ESC : NUL n NUL
Hex Code 1B 3A 00 n 00
Dec Code 27 58 0 n 0
Purpose Erases all downloaded characters.
† Discussion The printer ignores this command but removes all data sent.
188
Select Graphics Mode
Select Graphics Mode
ASCII Code ESC * m n1 n2
Hex Code 1B 2A m n1 n2
Dec Code 27 42 m n1 n2
Purpose Turns on 8-pin bit image graphics mode graphics modes available.
m . Table 42 charts the
Discussion The total number of columns = n1 + 256 n2.
n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)
This command does not suppress hexadecimal FF from printing.
Table 42. Epson Graphics Modes m Option
Alternate
Code
Density*
(dots per inch)
Resolution**
(dots per inch)
0
1
Single density
Double density
ESC K
ESC L
60
120
120
120
1
2 High-speed double density ESC Y 60
120
2
3
6
7
4
5
Quadruple density
CRT I
Plotter (1:1)
CRT II
Double density plotter
ESC Z none none none none
120
80
72
90
144
240
1,2,3
160
144
180
144
1
1
Prints at half speed.
2
Data can be sent incorrectly. In these modes, no dots can be closer horizontally than the current font dot density. Sending incorrect data does not damage the printer.
3
240 dpi is simulated by combining the dots from two adjacent columns into one 120 dpi dot column.
* Number of horizontal dots per inch the printer can make.
** Number of dot columns available.
189
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Select Italic Character Set
ASCII Code ESC t n
Hex Code 1B 74 n
Dec Code 27 116 n
Purpose Selects the italics characters from hex 80 through hex FF, or selects the graphics characters from hex 80 through hex FF.
where n = hex 01 selects the graphics character set n = hex 00 selects the italics character set
Discussion The graphics character set is the IBM Graphics Code Page 437.
Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode
ASCII Code ESC ^ m n1 n2 d1 ... dk
Hex Code 1B 5E m n1 n2 d1 ... dk
Dec Code 27 94 m n1 n2 d1 ... dk
Purpose Turns on 9-pin bit image graphics mode.
Discussion m defines the plot density as shown in Table 42 on page 189.
n1 + 256 n2 = The total number of columns.
n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = (Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)
This mode requires two bytes of graphic data for every column of print. Each column is sent as a pair: d1, d3, ... d ( k -1) set the top
8 bits of a normal dot column, just like ESC K; d2, d4, ... dk set the ninth dot in the column (the most significant bit) just below the bottom-most dot of columns d1, d3, ... d ( k -1).
190
Select Print Quality
Select Print Quality
ASCII Code ESC x n
Hex Code 1B 78 n
Dec Code 27 120 n
Purpose Selects print quality.
where n may be in the range from 0 through 4. Values in the range
5-255 are invalid.
n = 0 or 48 (hex 00 or hex 30) selects DP print quality n = 1 or 49 (hex 01 or hex 31) selects Near Letter Quality (NLQ) n = 2 or 50 (hex 02 or hex 32) selects HS print quality n = 3 or 51 (hex 03 or hex 33) selects OCR A print quality n = 4 or 52 (hex 04 or hex 34) selects OCR B print quality
Discussion This command overrides control panel print quality selections.
Note Some print attributes (such as condensed, double-wide, etc.) may not return to their previous setting when changing from OCR-A or OCR-B back to another Print Quality. For guaranteed results, all print attributes should be set after the
Print Quality is selected.
†
Selecting an OCR print quality overrides any character attributes set, such as condensed, double-wide, etc. Setting character attributes when OCR is set may cause unexpected results.
Draft, OCR A, and OCR B print qualities ( n = 2, 3, or 4) are not defined in Epson-FX printers.
Select/Deselect Proportional Spacing
ASCII Code ESC p n
Hex Code 1B 70 n
Dec Code 27 112 n where
Purpose n = 0 = Off n = 1 = On
Turns proportional mode on and off.
191
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Select Serif or Sans Serif Font
ASCII Code ESC k n
Hex Code 1B 6B n
Dec Code 27 107 n
† Purpose Selects an NLQ font.
where n may range from 0 through 255 (hex 00 through hex FF).
n = 0, 2, 4 .. (any even value), the font selected is a serif NLQ font (Courier, instead of standard Epson Roman).
n = 1, 3, 5 .. (any odd value), the font selected is a sans serif
NLQ font.
Select User-Defined Font
ASCII Code ESC % n
Hex Code 1B 25 n
Dec Code 27 37 n
Purpose Selects a user-defined font.
† Discussion The printer ignores this command and removes all font data sent from the data stream.
Select Vertical Tab Channel
ASCII Code ESC / c
Hex Code 1B 2F c
Dec Code 27 47 c
Purpose Selects a vertical tab channel set by ESC b.
where c = 0 through 7.
Discussion Subsequent VT (Hex 0B) commands use tab table specified by c . If no tab table is selected, channel 0 is used.
192
Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1/60 Inch
Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1/60 Inch
ASCII Code ESC $ n1 n2
Hex Code 1B 24 n1 n2
Dec Code 27 36 n1 n2
Purpose Moves the logical print head to an absolute horizontal print position, using 1/60 inch increments.
where ( n1 + [256 n2 ]) / 60 = the unsigned distance in inches from the left margin. n1 = (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of division of number of DATA bytes by 256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256) n2 = Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division)
Discussion If the distance goes beyond right margin, the sequence is ignored.
Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1
ASCII Code ESC >
Hex Code 1B 3E
Dec Code 27 62
Purpose Sets the most significant bit (MSB) of all incoming data to 1.
Discussion The MSB is bit number 7. This command only affects text and control code data. Graphics data pass through unchanged.
Set Form Length in Inches
ASCII Code ESC C NUL n
Hex Code 1B 43 00 n
Dec Code 27 67 0 n
Purpose where
Sets form length to n inches.
n = whole numbers from 1 through 24 to specify the number of inches on a form.
Discussion Upon receipt of this code, the current line becomes the first line of the form, and the form length set becomes the current forms length. Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the form are ignored. Forms length is defined in inches; therefore, subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command.
Values of n greater than 24 are ignored.
When forms length is set by an ESC C sequence, the skip-over perforation set by ESC N is cancelled.
This control code overrides forms length set at the control panel.
193
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Set Form Length in Lines
ASCII Code ESC C n
Hex Code 1B 43 n
Dec Code 27 67 n
Purpose Sets the form length by lines.
where n = 1 through 192 (hex 01 through C0) to specify the number of lines per form at the current line spacing.
Discussion The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the quotient of n divided by the current lines per inch so that the units are in inches.
The current line becomes the first line of the form. The forms length is always defined in inches; therefore, changing the lpi after this control code has been issued does not change the forms length.
If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple of the target machine dot size, the forms length value will be adjusted down to the next possible multiple.
When forms length is set by an ESC C sequence, the skip-over perforation set by ESC N is cancelled.
194
Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1/120 Inch
Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1/120 Inch
ASCII Code ESC SP n
Hex Code 1B 20 n
Dec Code 27 32 n
Purpose Permits character spacing adjustments in 1/120 inch increments.
where n = 0 through 127 (hex 00 through 7F).
Set Margin, Left
ASCII Code ESC l n (lowercase “L”)
Hex Code 1B 6C n
Dec Code 27 108 n where n = number of columns from the left edge of the physical page to the beginning of the print line; n = 1 through 232 (hex 00 through hex E8)
Purpose Sets the left margin to n columns in the current font.
Discussion Be sure to use the alphabetic lowercase “L” (as in left) rather than the numeral “1” (one) for this command. The number of inches of margin does not vary if the font, character width, or horizontal dot density changes. This command automatically clears and resets horizontal tabs to every eight characters. The smallest possible space between the left and right margins is the width of one double-wide, 10 cpi character. If a margin control code violates this minimum distance, it is ignored. Settings in proportional mode are treated as 10 CPI.
Set Margin, Right
ASCII Code ESC Q n
Hex Code 1B 51 n
Dec Code 27 81 n where n = number of columns from the left edge of the physical page to the end of the print line; n = 1 through 232 (hex 00 through hex E8)
Sets the right margin to n columns at the current character width.
Purpose
Discussion The number of inches of margin does not vary if the font, character width, or horizontal dot density changes. This command automatically clears and resets horizontal tabs to every eight characters. The smallest possible space between the left and right margins is the width of one-double wide, 10 cpi character. If a margin control code violates this minimum distance, it is ignored. Settings in proportional mode are treated as 10 CPI.
195
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1/120 Inch
ASCII Code ESC \ n1 n2
Hex Code 1B 5C n1 n2
Dec Code 27 92 n1 n2
Purpose Moves the logical print head to a relative horizontal print position, using 1/120 inch increments.
Discussion Adds ( n1 + 256 n2 ) / 120 inches to the horizontal position of the logical print head. The number sent is two’s complement, with negative numbers moving to the left. The command is ignored if it would move the logical print head beyond the page margins.
Set Vertical Tabs in Channels
ASCII Code ESC b c n1 n2 n3 ... n16 NUL
Hex Code 1B 62 c n1 n2 n3 ... n16 00
Dec Code 27 98 c n1 n2 n3 ... n16 0
Purpose Assigns vertical tabs to channels selected by ESC /.
where c = 0 through 7 n = 0 through 255 (hex 00 through FF).
n1 through nk specify the line number for the vertical tab(s), up to a maximum of 16 tab positions. NUL must end the sequence.
Discussion Channels are selected by ESC /. The distance of each tab stop from TOF is the current line spacing times the number of lines given in n.
If paper movement is commanded to a value of n greater than the page length, the paper movement command is ignored. The values of n must be in ascending order. If they are not, the sequence up to and including the out of sequence number is ignored. The rest of the load is processed. Skip over perforation is ignored.
You can clear any channel by sending ESC b c NUL, where c is the channel number.
196
Skip Over Perforation
Skip Over Perforation
ASCII Code ESC N n
Hex Code 1B 4E n
Dec Code 27 78 n
Purpose Selects the number of lines (at the current line spacing) for the paper to skip at the bottom of the page.
where n = 1 through 127 (hex 01 through 7F)
Discussion n is the number of lines skipped between the last line printed on one page and the first line on the next page. The actual distance set is the product of n and the current line spacing. If the value of n exceeds the current form length, the skip is set to one line smaller than the form length or to 0, whichever is greater.
Skip over perforation set by this command overrides control panel settings. This feature is canceled by ESC O, ESC C, ESC
C 0.
Skip Over Perforation, Cancel
ASCII Code ESC O
Hex Code 1B 4F
Dec Code 27 79
Purpose Cancels the skip over perforation set by ESC N and resets the bottom margin to zero.
Discussion O is ASCII uppercase o, not zero (0).
197
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Superscript and Subscript Printing
ASCII Code ESC S n
Hex Code 1B 53 n
Dec Code 27 83 n
Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing.
where n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) to enable superscript printing n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) to enable subscript printing
† Discussion Superscript prints full-sized characters with a baseline higher than the normal characters. Subscript prints full-sized characters with a baseline lower than the normal characters. When the control code is received, all characters are superscript or subscript until reset by ESC T or printer reset. (This differs from the Epson standard, which utilizes half-size characters for superscript and subscript printing.)
You can print both superscript and subscript characters in the same character column by using the Backspace (BS) control code, but these characters will not print when double high printing is in effect.
If Superscript/Subscript is combined with Double High (ESC w) printing, only Double High printing will occur.
Example The following sample illustrates superscript and subscript printing.
Superscript and Subscript Printing, Cancel
ASCII Code ESC T
Hex Code 1B 54
Dec Code 27 84
Purpose Cancels superscript and/or subscript printing as set by ESC S n.
198
Underline
Underline
ASCII Code ESC - n
Hex Code 1B 2D n
Dec Code 27 45 n
Purpose Turns automatic underlining on and off.
where n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) to turn off underlining n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) to turn on underlining
Discussion Spaces are underlined, but graphics and grey scale characters are not.
Example The following sample illustrates underlining.
Unidirectional Printing, 1 Line
ASCII Code ESC <
Hex Code 1B 3C
Dec Code 27 60
Purpose Causes printing to occur from left to right for one line only.
Discussion Printing normally occurs in both directions of shuttle movement.
This command causes the printer to print from left to right for one line. The command is cancelled by a CR.
Unidirectional Printing, Set/Reset
ASCII Code ESC U n
Hex Code 1B 55 n
Dec Code 27 85 n
Purpose where
Causes printing to occur in only one direction of shuttle movement (left to right).
n = NUL (hex 00) or 0 (hex 30) to turn off unidirectional printing n = SOH (hex 01) or 1 (hex 31) to turn on unidirectional printing
Discussion Printing normally occurs in both directions of shuttle movement.
Unidirectional printing slows the printer down approximately
50%, but is sometimes used when very accurate dot placement is desired in graphics.
199
Chapter 5 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control Codes
Vertical Tab, Execute
ASCII Code VT
Hex Code 0B
Dec Code 11
Purpose Advances the logical print head to the next vertical tab position selected by ESC /.
Discussion If no vertical channel was selected, channel 0 is used. If no vertical tabs were set, the paper advances one line.
The logical print head moves to the left margin. If a tab position is on the current line, the paper is moved to the next tab position.
If there are no tab positions between the current line and the end of the form, the paper is moved to the top of the next form.
This code cancels all one-line-only emphasis and font controls: double-wide from SO and ESC SO, and unidirectional printing from ESC <.
Vertical Tab, Set/Clear
ASCII Code ESC B n1 n2 n3...nk NUL
Hex Code 1B 42 n1 n2 n3...nk 00
Dec Code 27 66 n1 n2 n3...nk 0
Purpose Sets up to 16 vertical tab positions.
where n = 1 through 255 (hex 01 through FF).
k = 1 through 16 (hex 01 through 10).
n1 through nk specify the line numbers for the vertical tab(s), up to a maximum of 16 tab positions. NUL must end the sequence
To clear the tab settings, send ESC B NUL (1B 42 00).
Discussion The values of n range from 1 through 255 (hex 01 through FF) and must be in ascending order. The distance of each tab stop from TOF is the current line spacing times the number of lines given in n . If the value of n exceeds the form length, commands to move to that tab position are ignored.
If values of n are not in ascending order, the sequence up to and including the out-of-sequence number is ignored, and the rest of the load is processed. Skip over perforation is ignored.
This command always sets channel 0. You can clear channel 0 by sending ESC B NUL. (See also the channel selection command, ESC /, and the channel loading command, ESC b.)
200
6
Graphics
Overview
This chapter explains how the printer produces graphic images.
The quickest way to produce graphic images is to use one of the many graphics software applications available. Any graphics program that is compatible with the Epson FX, Proprinter XL, or P-Series emulation should provide excellent results.
You can also use the Intelligent Graphics Processor (IGP) Printronix emulation or the Code V Printronix emulation. Both allow you to create and store forms, generate logos, bar codes, expanded characters, and other graphics.
Printing text and characters is the default mode of operation. However, your printer can print graphics.
• When the emulation is in the Proprinter XL or Epson FX protocol mode,
Bit Image graphics is used for graphics printing.
• When the emulation is in the P-Series protocol mode, Odd/Even dot plotting is used for graphics printing.
Each line of graphics data must include a graphics control code to enable the emulation for the desired graphics mode of operation.
Bit Image Graphics
When the printer uses the IBM Proprinter XL or Epson FX emulation, it creates graphics by accepting bit image graphics data.
Note Text and graphics can be mixed on the same line when the printer plots bit images in the Epson or Proprinter XL emulation.
Bit image graphics are created by vertically printing the bit pattern of a series of data bytes. For example, the bit pattern of the ASCII character A (hex 41, decimal 65) is shown in Figure 4. If we rotate this data byte 90 degrees clockwise, we have a vertical data byte with the most significant bit (MSB) at the top. If we then print each 1 (true) bit as a dot, the result is a “bit image” plot of the ASCII character A.
201
Chapter 6 Bit Image Graphics
ASCII character A = Hex 41 = Binary 01000001
MSB : Most Significant Bit
MSB
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
MSB
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Figure 4. Vertical Data Byte Pattern
The relationship between the ASCII character, its decimal value, and its bit image plot is shown in Figure 5. All 8 bits of the data byte are used in all fonts, but some fonts have taller and shorter characters. (You may have to adjust the line spacing in order to print without horizontal gaps.) Data bytes are identified by their binary, octal, hexadecimal, or decimal equivalents. These numeric equivalents are combined in data streams to form graphic patterns such as the one illustrated in Figure 6.
ASCII
Character
Decimal
Value
A = 65 =
Binary
Code
Equivalent to
Vertically
Rotated Data
Byte
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
MSB
=
Printed
Bit Image
Figure 5. Bit Image Pattern from an ASCII Character
Bit Image plotting is not limited to printable ASCII characters. You can print Bit
Image patterns for any 8-bit data byte with decimal values ranging from 0 through 255. (The ASCII character set is charted in Appendix A.)
202
Designing a Bit Image Pattern
Designing a Bit Image Pattern
A Bit Image pattern is produced in four steps:
1.
On a quadrille pad or graph paper, lay out the graphic pattern you want to print. (See Figure 6.)
2.
Determine the decimal equivalent of each vertical data byte in your pattern. (The sum of the decimal equivalent of each true bit in the vertical data byte is the decimal equivalent of the data byte.)
3.
Write a program to generate the pattern.
4.
Enter and run the program on the host computer.
Decimal
Weights
MSB 128
64
32
LSB
16
8
4
2
1
1st Bit Image Data Byte
2nd Bit Image Data Byte
7th Bit Image Date Byte
73
146
36
255
36
146
73
Decimal
Equivalents
Figure 6. Bit Image Pattern Plan
Bit Image Density
You can print bit image graphics in different dot densities. Select dot densities by sending a control code in the data stream.
Note Every line of graphics data must include the necessary plot mode command so the printer can perform the chosen graphics functions.
Single Density Mode: ESC K
Single density bit image graphics in a Data Processing (DP) print quality are printed at 60 dots per inch (dpi) horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. For NLQ print quality, the horizontal dot density is 90 dpi and vertical dot density is 96 dpi. For High Speed (HS) draft print quality, horizontal dot density is 60 dpi and vertical dot density is 48 dpi.
203
Chapter 6 Bit Image Graphics
Double Density Mode: ESC L
Double density mode prints up to twice the number of dots per inch horizontally in the same space used for single density. The vertical dot density remains the same as in single density mode. Double horizontal density requires twice the number of input data bytes to print the same length line as single density. Printing double density reduces the printing speed by half.
Double Speed - Double Density Mode: ESC Y
When the double density - double speed control code is received, data bytes print at double the current horizontal dot density, but adjacent dots are not printed. Since double density graphics are printed at half speed, double speed
- double density graphics are printed at the same speed as single density graphics. This mode is often used to position a simulated print head precisely by sending blank dot columns.
Quadruple Density Mode: ESC Z
When printing quadruple density graphics, the printer combines adjacent quadruple density bit image bytes. The compounded data are then printed in double density mode.
Bit Image Programming Format
The bit image command format is:
ESC CC n1 n2 DATA where:
ESC
CC the serial matrix SFCC
K, L, Y or Z to select dot density
(K = single, L = double, Y = double density - double speed, Z=quadruple density) n1 (Number of DATA bytes) - 256( n2 )
(remainder of devision of number of DATA bytes by
256, sometimes referred to as MOD 256)
(Number of DATA bytes) / 256 (quotient of division) n2
DATA the dot pattern bytes
The syntax of the bit image expression must be correct.
The number of data bytes and the n1, n2 definition must be equal.
Any characters following n1 and n2 are interpreted and plotted as data until the n1, n2 definition is satisfied.
If n1 = n2 = 0, then control codes K, L, Y, or Z are ignored.
The maximum number of data bytes that can be included in the DATA portion of the program statement (when using 132 column paper) varies according to the dot density:
At 60 dpi, single density = 792 bytes double density = 1584 bytes quadruple density = 3168 bytes
204
Bit Image Sample Program
Data that go past the right margin are discarded if automatic line feed is disabled. If automatic line feed is enabled, data that go past the right margin trigger an automatic line feed (LF) and are printed on the next line.
Bit Image Sample Program
The program below, written in BASIC, produces the single density bit image pattern shown in Figure 7. The 7-byte pattern is repeated 40 times.
Depending on the host computer system, it may be necessary to add a width statement to the BASIC program.
10 WIDTH “LPT1:”, 255
20 LPRINT “Single Density Bit Image Graphics”
30 LPRINT CHR$(27);“K”;CHR$(24);CHR$(1);
40 FOR N=1 TO 40
50 RESTORE
60 FOR I=1 TO 7
70 READ R
80 LPRINT CHR$(R);
90 NEXT I
100 NEXT N
110 DATA 73, 146, 36, 255, 36, 146, 73
120 LPRINT
Figure 7. Sample Single-Density Bit Image Graphics
205
Chapter 6 Plot Mode
Plot Mode
Plot mode is available for the P-Series protocol only.
This subsection describes the P-Series compatible odd/even dot Plot mode of operation. The P-Series plot has a rigid format wherein each line of data contains a plot command code, the plot data, and an LF code (hex 0A).
The P-Series codes (hex 04 and 05, respectively) can be placed anywhere on the command line.
When P-Series Plot mode is enabled by an EOT (hex 04) or ENQ (hex 05) code, all control codes except LF, CR, and FF, are ignored. Any control sequence parameter prior to a plot code is acted upon immediately.
If any combination of EOT (hex 04) or ENQ (hex 05) code is received in a single line, the priority of action is:
• EOT (hex 04) takes priority over ENQ (hex 05)
• ENQ has the same priority level and is acted upon in the order received
A printable symbol is defined as any character or command that might cause the head of a serial printer to move away from character column one.
Plot Density
Plot density refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) printed in a single dot row. Two types of plot density are available with P-Series Plot mode graphics: normal density and high density. The densities can be mixed within the printed page on a dot row-by-row basis, but the two densities cannot be mixed on the same dot row.
Normal density plotting is selected with the odd dot plot control code ENQ
(hex 05). The odd numbered dot columns are addressed to produce a vertical density that varies based on the font selected: 72 dpi vertical for Letter Gothic
(DP), and 144 dpi vertical for Courier (NLQ). Figure 8 illustrates normal density dot plot.
Figure 8. Normal Density Plot
206
Plot Data Byte Format
High density plotting is selected with the even dot plot control code EOT (hex
04) in conjunction with the odd dot plot control code ENQ (hex 05). The odd and even numbered dot columns are addressed to double the horizontal density. The vertical density remains the same in normal and high density plotting, though vertical density is based on the current print mode. Figure 9 illustrates high density plotting.
Figure 9. High Density Plot
Plot Data Byte Format
In P-Series Plot Mode, the format is as follows:
1.
Each data byte specifies six out of twelve plot dot columns.
2.
Using odd dot plot mode, bits 1 to 6 of the data byte address the oddnumbered dot columns; using even dot plot mode, bits 1 to 6 of the data byte address the even-numbered dot columns.
3.
Bit 6 and/or bit 7 of the data byte must be a “1” (or true) bit in the Plot mode.
4.
Bit 8 of the data byte is not used in the Plot mode and may be 1 or 0.
5.
The binary equivalent of the plot data bytes must be known to accurately address specific dot positions.
As shown in Figure 10, a dot is printed at the location addressed by each of bits 1 to 6 in the data byte that is set (1 or true).
207
Chapter 6 Plot Mode
EVEN DOT PLOT DATA BYTE
LSB MSB
BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 8
1 0 1 0 1 1 0 NOT
USED
2 4 6 8 10 12
NOTE: BIT 6
AND/OR BIT 7
MUST BE 1"
FOR PLOT MODE
DOT COLUMN
#12 OF PREVIOUS
CHARACTER
COLUMN
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
DOT COLUMN #1 OF
NEXT CHARACTER
COLUMN
1 3 5 7 9 11
1 1 1 0 1 1 1 NOT
USED
BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 BIT 8
LSB MSB
ODD DOT PLOT DATA BYTE
NOTE: IN ACTUAL
PRINTING, THESE
TWO ROWS MERGE
TO PRINT ON THE
SAME ROW.
Figure 10. P-Series Plot Data Byte Format
Plot Data Line Format
A plot data line may contain the following plot data bytes: When using 132 column paper, the maximum bytes are 132 for a horizontal dot density of 60 dpi or 198 bytes for a horizontal dot density of 90 dpi. If Auto Line Feed is disabled, any bytes over the maximum are lost. If the maximum is exceeded and Auto Line Feed is enabled, a Line Feed (LF) is forced and the remaining plot data is printed as text on the next line.
The plot mode control code may occur anywhere in the line prior to the line terminator, but plot speed may decrease if it is not at the beginning of the line.
208
Plot Data Line Format
Normal Density Plot
For normal density plot, the plot line contains: Control Code hex 05, plot data bytes, and a Line Terminator (hex 0A or hex 0C). The control sequence for sending the P-Series Normal Density Plot is as follows:
1.
Send the plot command code ENQ (hex 05).
2.
Send the plot data bytes (refer to page 213).
3.
Send a line terminator, either a Line Feed (LF, hex 0A) or a Form Feed
(FF, hex 0C). A Carriage Return (CR) may also be used instead of the LF code, provided the Carriage Return has been configured for Carriage
Return = Carriage Return + Line Feed (CR = CR + LF).
a.
A line feed (hex 0A) used as the line terminator plots the contents of the buffer and advances the paper position a single dot row, based on the vertical density of the current mode.
b.
A form feed (hex 0C) used as the line terminator plots the contents of the buffer and advances the paper to the next TOF.
4.
Regardless of which line terminator code is sent, the emulation will default to the previously selected print mode unless further plot control codes are provided with the data.
Double Density Plot
For double density plot, the plot line contains: Control Code hex 04, plot data bytes, a Line Terminator (hex 0A or hex 0C), Control Code hex 05, plot data bytes, and a Line Terminator. The control sequence for sending P-Series
Double Density Plot is as follows:
1.
Send the even dot plot control code EOT (hex 04), followed by plot data bytes (refer to page 213).
2.
Send a line terminator, which causes the emulation to plot the data bytes; the paper position is not advanced in Double Density Plot; the emulation now waits for the second plot command and plot data bytes.
3.
Send the odd dot plot control code ENQ (hex 05) and a second line of data, followed by a line terminator.
a.
A line feed (hex 0A) used as the line terminator plots the contents of the buffer and advances the paper position a single dot row, based on the vertical density of the current mode. A CR (if CR = CR + LF is configured) may also be used with the same result. b.
A form feed (hex 0C) used as the line terminator plots the data bytes and advances the paper position to the next TOF.
4.
Regardless of which line terminator code is sent, the emulation will default to the previously selected print mode unless further plot control codes are provided with the data.
209
Chapter 6 Plot Mode
Plotting the Data
P-Series Plot Mode plots the image from the horizontal bit pattern. Figure 11 duplicates the pattern shown in Figure 6 but is modified for Odd Dot Plot.
Eight dot rows are required, two characters per row, six columns per character.
DOT
ROW
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
1st
CHARACTER
ODD COLUMNS
1 3 5 7 9 11
2nd
CHARACTER
ODD COLUMNS
1 3 5 7 9 11
1st
CHARACTER
ASCII DECIMAL
\
*
|
*
|
\
*
|
42
73
92
42
73
92
42
73
2nd
CHARACTER
ASCII DECIMAL
@
A
@
@
A
@
@
A
65
64
64
65
64
65
64
64
Figure 11. Odd Dot Plot Pattern Plan
The following program uses the Odd Dot Plot control code to produce the image. The image is printed 25 times as shown in Figure 12. An entire dot row is plotted in one printing pass. Consequently, the first row of all 25 images is printed in one pass, followed by the second row, etc., until all rows have been printed.
10 LPRINT “Odd Dot Plot”
20 FOR I=1 TO 8
30 READ R1
40 READ R2
50 LPRINT CHR$(5);
60 FOR N=1 TO 25
70 LPRINT CHR$(R1);CHR$(R2);
80 NEXT N
90 LPRINT
100 NEXT I
110 DATA 42, 64, 73, 65, 92, 64, 42, 64, 73, 65, 92, 64, 42, 64, 73, 65
120 LPRINT
Figure 12. Sample Odd Dot Plot
210
Exiting from P-Series Plot Mode
Exiting from P-Series Plot Mode
When returning to the print mode from the P-Series Plot Mode, an extra line feed should be included in the data stream to maintain proper print line registration relative to the last line of plot graphics. If the extra line feed is not included, the first character line after the graphics data may be truncated, as shown in Figure 13.
plot data
@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
A text line follows plot data, preceded by a single line terminator code. (Text characters may extend into the range of the previously printed plot line and appear truncated.)
Note plot data
@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
A text line follows plot data, but is preceded by an additional line terminator or LF code. (Characters are printed at full-height.)
Figure 13. Truncated Character Line
Adding the additional line terminator will cause the text lines for the remainder of the document to be shifted down from the text lines above the plot dot rows plotted into the last character row.
211
Chapter 6 Combining Graphics and Text
Combining Graphics and Text
The LinePrinter Plus Emulation is capable of combining graphics and characters (text) on the same page in two ways:
• Use Bit Image graphics or P-Series Plot mode to produce characters as well as graphics
• A combination of text (not plot) and graphics can be mixed on the same page within all protocols.
Text and graphics can be mixed on the same line, however, only by using the
Bit Image graphics in the Epson FX or Proprinter XL protocols.
Any character or symbol can be created in the Plot mode or with Bit Image graphics simply by addressing and plotting the appropriate dot positions.
Either Bit Image or Plot mode graphics can be mixed with text within the page on a line by line basis. Each line of graphics data must include a graphics control code or the emulation will automatically default to the print mode.
Using Bit Image graphics, it is possible to use the print mode to produce text on one print pass followed by a print pass to produce graphics on the same line; however, text characters can be affected by the Bit Image data when combined on the same line.
The plot data byte dot patterns shown on page 213 that are referenced in the description of P-Series plot mode on page 208.
212
Plot Data Byte Dot Patterns
Plot Data Byte Dot Patterns
^ __
213
Chapter 6 Combining Graphics and Text
214
7
Vertical Page Formatting
Overview
Rapid vertical paper movement is called slewing. A vertical format unit (VFU) is a program you load into the printer that enables it to slew paper to preset locations on a page.
On your printer, LF commands and other commands that produce blank lines are accumulated and moved in one efficient paper motion. The VFUs are maintained for compatibility with earlier applications.
Following an introductory overview of how to plan a vertical page format, the following two methods of vertical formatting are described in this chapter:
• Vertical tab table: The IBM Proprinter XL and the Epson FX emulations each contain a vertical tab table. It is a set of programmed vertical tabs.
• Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU): Only the P-Series emulation provides the EVFU capability.
Planning a Vertical Page Format
Vertical page formatting with a VFU consists of four steps:
1.
Select the type of vertical format you want to use. This is covered in the next section.
2.
Design the form, determining the spacing and channel assignments for every line. Channel assignments are discussed in the VFU sections.
3.
Determine the programming sequence. The format of the sequence depends on the type of VFU you select and is discussed in each VFU section of this chapter.
4.
Send the programming sequence to the printer in the host data stream.
This loads the VFU program.
215
Chapter 7 Proprinter and Epson Vertical Tab Table
VFU Characteristics
Keep in mind the following information when programming and using a VFU:
Elongated Characters. You can use elongated (double high) characters in
VFU programs. The VFU automatically counts one line of elongated characters as two character lines.
VFU Not Loaded. If the VFU is not loaded, the printer performs a single line feed in response to VFU commands.
Paper Runaway Protection. If the VFU memory is loaded and a channel code is sent that was not previously loaded, the printer moves the paper a single line feed.
Line Spacing. The printer can use either 6 or 8 lines per inch (lpi) spacing.
These VFUs calculate the forms length by line density selected. The 6 and 8 lpi spacing may be mixed on the same form, but should be done carefully.
Form Feed. A form feed sent from the control panel or a command from the host moves the paper to the first channel 1, which is the top of form.
Vertical Tab. A VT command moves the paper to the next channel 12. If a channel 12 is not loaded, a line feed will occur.
Proprinter and Epson Vertical Tab Table
The IBM Proprinter XL and the Epson FX emulations each contain a vertical tab table. It is a set of programmed vertical tabs. Various lines of the form are assigned vertical tabs, which are then accessed by control code for rapid paper advancement to the tab position.
Two control codes are used for vertical tabbing: ESC B sets single channel vertical tabs, and VT executes a vertical tab. These codes are described in
Chapters 4 and 5, which cover the Proprinter and Epson emulations, respectively. The Epson emulation also has ESC / to select one of eight tab channels and ESC b to set the tabs in a particular channel.
Executing Vertical Tabs
The vertical tab execute code is VT (hex 0B). It prints the contents of the print buffer (if data are in the buffer) and causes paper movement to the next predefined vertical tab position. If a tab position is not defined, the paper is moved to the next line at the current line spacing. If a tab position is at the current line, the paper is moved to the next tab position. If no tab positions are defined between the current line and the end of the form, the paper moves to the next TOF.
216
Vertical Tab Positions
Vertical Tab Positions
Vertical tab positions are set by line number. A maximum of 16 vertical tab positions can be set on the form. A sample format is shown in Figure 14.
The first vertical tab is set at line 6 for part number data, a second tab is set at line 8 for part name data, and a third tab is set at line 14 for quantity data. The
ESC B code assigns the vertical tabs to the lines of the form. Once the tab positions are set, sending the vertical tab execute code (VT) causes the paper
(currently at the top-of-form position) to advance to the first tab position for
PART NUMBER data. Sending another VT moves the paper to the second tab position for PART NAME, followed by a third VT to access the third tab position for QUANTITY data.
Form Data
PART NUMBER
PART NAME
QUANTITY
Form Line Number
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Vertical Tabs
Top of Form
Tab 1
Tab 2
Tab 3
20
Figure 14. Example of Vertical Tab Positions
217
Chapter 7 P-Series EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit)
P-Series EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit)
The EVFU may be selected in P-Series protocol. The EVFU provides 14 channels to identify up to 192 lines depending on the paper instruction. The programming sequence is 1) start load code; 2) line identification code; and 3) end load code.
Start Load Code - Hex 1E
The start load code clears and initializes the EVFU memory for the memory load program. The start load code is hex 1E.
Channel Assignment
The EVFU memory has the capacity for 192-line forms. The first line identification code (channel code) in the memory load program defines the first line on the form; the second line identification code defines the second line on the form, etc. Each line must have a line identification code. Filler channel codes are used for lines that will not be accessed by the print program. Any channel code can be used as a filler except channel code 1, which is reserved for the top-of-form, and channel code 12, which is reserved as the vertical tab channel. The same filler channel code can be repeated as necessary for any number of lines.
Channel 1. The top-of-form code, reserved as the first line on the form or the first line printed (top-of-form position). The operating program sends the channel 1 code to advance to the top of the next form. After the memory is loaded, a Form Feed code (FF, hex 0C) will move the paper to the next channel 1 (top-of-form).
Channels 2 through 11, 13 and 14. Used as general channel codes (line identification codes) or filler channels. Each line on the form must be identified by a channel code. When the operating program sends the channel code, the paper advances to the line identified by the channel code. Lines not used by the operating program must be identified by filler channels (unused channel codes).
Channel 12. Reserved as the Vertical Tab channel. The Vertical Tab code
(VT, hex 0B) prints any data in the print buffer and rapidly slews the paper to the next line identified by the channel 12 code. If channel 12 is not loaded in the EVFU memory, a single line feed will be executed when a VT code is sent.
Channel 15 and 16. The codes for Channels 15 and 16 function as the Start
Load and End Load codes.
End Load - Hex 1F
The end load code terminates the memory load program. The end load code is hex 1F. Channel codes in excess of 192 channels received prior to the end load code are discarded.
218
Using the EVFU
Hex
1C
1D
1E
1F
18
19
1A
1B
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
ASCII
Dec.
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
Using the EVFU
Once the EVFU program has been enabled and loaded, sending the appropriate channel code to the printer will cause any data in the buffer to print and will position the paper to the next line on the form having the specified channel number assigned in EVFU memory.
For a data byte to be recognized as an EVFU instruction, the following criteria must be met:
• Data bit 5 must be 1 (set)
• Data bits 6-8 must be 0 (not set)
Given these conditions, the lower four bits of a byte will specify the EVFU channel number. Table 43 lists the EVFU channels and their equivalent data bytes.
Table 43. P-Series EVFU Codes
Data Bits
Code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
FS
GS
RS
US
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
(X = Undefined, 0, or 1) (1 = High) (0 = Low)
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
Channel
1
0 1 (TOF)
1 2
0 3
1 4
0 5
1 6
0 7
1 8
0 9
1 10
0 11
1 12 (VT)
0 13
1 14
0 Start Load
1 End Load
219
Chapter 7 P-Series EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit)
Note The ESC code cannot be used simultaneously as the EVFU
VT code and the Special Function Control Code (SFCC).
Refer to the appropriate protocol chapter for more information on the SFCC.
Clearing the EVFU Memory
The following actions will reset (clear) the EVFU memory:
1.
Sending only the start load code.
2.
Sending a start load code followed immediately by an end load code.
3.
A second start load code is received, resulting in reinitialization of the
EVFU. (This allows the host data to be restarted.)
When the EVFU memory is cleared, the forms length returns to the previously set value and the current print position becomes the top-of-form (TOF).
220
A
Standard ASCII Character
Set
KEY
0
1
1
B7
BITS
B6
B5
B4 B3 B2 B1
0
0
1
1 0 1 1
1
0
0
1
ESC
33
27
1B
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX
ASCII CHARACTER
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
B4
B7
BITS
0
B6 0
B5
COLUMN
0
B3 B2 B1
ROW
0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0
1
2
NUL
SOH
STX
1
1
1
0
0
0
2
2
2
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
10
8
8
7
7
7
11
9
9
6
6
6
5
5
5
3
3
3
4
4
4
14
12
0 C
15
13
0 D
16
14
0 E
17
15
0 F
12
10
0 A
13
11
0 B
0
0
1
1
DLE
DC1
(XON)
DC2
DC3
(XOFF)
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
27
23
17
30
24
18
25
21
15
26
22
16
31
25
19
23
19
13
24
20
14
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
0
1
0
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
+
-
/
*
.
,
’
2
47
39
27
50
40
28
45
37
25
46
38
26
51
41
29
43
35
23
44
36
24
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
@
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
107
71
47
110
72
48
105
69
45
106
70
46
111
73
49
103
67
43
104
68
44
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
\
[
]
^
_
5
127
87
57
130
88
58
125
85
55
126
86
56
131
89
59
123
83
53
124
84
54
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
3
67
55
37
70
56
38
65
53
35
66
54
36
71
57
39
63
51
33
64
52
34
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
72
58
3A
73
59
3B a b c d e f g h j i k l m n o
6 7 p q r s t u v w x y z
{
|
}
~
DEL
167
119
77
170
120
78
165
117
75
166
118
76
171
121
79
163
115
73
164
116
74
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
147
103
67
150
104
68
145
101
65
146
102
66
151
105
69
143
99
63
144
100
64
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
221
Appendix A
222
B
P-Series Emulation
Character Sets
Introduction
This appendix shows the character set charts (also referred to as code pages) for the P-Series emulation. The character sets are shown in Near Letter
Quality (NLQ). They may be selected using the configuration menus, described in detail in your User’s Guide . There are also several control codes that allow you to select different character sets, described in Chapter 3 of this book. These include “SFCC l”, “SFCC OSET”, “SFCC R” and “SFCC PSET”.
The maximum set of printable symbols is shown for columns hex 80-9F
(selected via the ESC 6 control code).
223
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
IBM PC, Primary Subset: ASCII (USA)
224
IBM PC, Primary Subset: French
225
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
IBM PC, Primary Subset: German
226
IBM PC, Primary Subset: English (UK)
227
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Danish
228
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Swedish
229
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Italian
230
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Spanish
231
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Japanese
232
IBM PC, Primary Subset: French Canadian
233
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Latin American
234
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Danish II
235
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Spanish II
236
IBM PC, Primary Subset: Latin American II
237
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
IBM PC, Extended Subset: 0437 PC Character Set
238
IBM PC, Extended Subset: 0850 PC Multilingual
239
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
Multinational, ASCII (USA)
240
Multinational, EBCDIC
241
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: ASCII (USA)
242
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: German
243
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Swedish
244
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Danish
245
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Norwegian
246
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Finnish
247
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: English (UK)
248
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Dutch
249
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: French
250
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Spanish
251
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Italian
252
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Turkish
253
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: Japanese
254
ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Multinational
255
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Barcode 10 cpi
256
ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Greek
257
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Graphic
258
ECMA Latin 1, Extended Subset: Scientific 10 cpi
259
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
DEC Multinational, ASCII (USA)
260
DEC Multinational, French
261
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
DEC Multinational, German
262
DEC Multinational, English (UK)
263
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
DEC Multinational, Norwegian/Danish
264
DEC Multinational, Swedish
265
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
DEC Multinational, Italian
266
DEC Multinational, Spanish
267
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
DEC Multinational, Japanese
268
DEC Multinational, French Canadian
269
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
DEC Multinational, Dutch
270
DEC Multinational, Finnish
271
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
DEC Multinational, Swiss
272
OCR A
273
Appendix B P-Series Emulation Character Sets
OCR B
274
C
Proprinter Emulation
Character Sets
Introduction
This appendix shows the character set charts (also referred to as code pages) for the Proprinter emulation. The character sets are shown in Near Letter
Quality (NLQ). They may be selected using the configuration menus, described in detail in your User’s Guide .
The maximum set of printable symbols is shown for columns hex 80-9F
(selected via the ESC 6 control code).
275
Appendix C Proprinter Emulation Character Sets
0437 PC Character Set
276
0850 PC Multilingual
277
Appendix C Proprinter Emulation Character Sets
OCR A
278
OCR B
279
Appendix C Proprinter Emulation Character Sets
280
D
Epson Emulation
Character Sets
Introduction
This appendix shows the character set charts (also referred to as code pages) for the Epson emulation. The character sets are shown in Near Letter Quality
(NLQ). They may be selected using the configuration menus, described in detail in your User’s Guide . The international character sets may be selected using the ESC R n control code (see page 167).
The maximum set of printable symbols is shown for columns hex 80-9F
(selected via the ESC I or ESC 6 control code).
281
Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets
0437 PC Character Set
282
0850 PC Multilingual
283
Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets
Epson Set, ASCII (USA)
284
Epson Set, French
285
Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets
Epson Set, German
286
Epson Set, English (UK)
287
Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets
Epson Set, Danish I
288
Epson Set, Swedish
289
Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets
Epson Set, Italian
290
Epson Set, Spanish I
291
Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets
Epson Set, Japanese
292
Epson Set, Norwegian
293
Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets
Epson Set, Danish II
294
Epson Set, Spanish II
295
Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets
Epson Set, Latin American I
296
Epson Set, French Canadian
297
Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets
Epson Set, Latin American II
298
OCR A
299
Appendix D Epson Emulation Character Sets
OCR B
300
Index
A
Adjustments loading Flash memory, 20 software upgrades, 20
ASCII Character Set, 221
Attribute Set and Reset Codes
P-Series, 82
Available symbol sets
Table, 48
B
Bar Code Types
Table, 34
Bar codes
PCL-II, 34
Bar Code, US POSTNET, 256X
US POSTNET Bar Code, 44
BEL (Bell)
Proprinter control code, 122
Binary data, printing
PCL-II, 72
Bit image density selection, 203
Bit image graphics bit pattern from ASCII character, 202 for Proprinter and Epson emulations, 201 sample program, 205
Bit image pattern procedure for designing, 203
Bit image programming format, 204
Bold
PCL-II, 71
BS (Backspace)
Proprinter control code, 122
C
CAN (Cancel)
Proprinter control code, 128
Carriage Control
Directives, 75
Carriage Return
Epson FX-1050, 166
Proprinter emulation, 128
Character density selection
PCL-II, 47
Character font selection
PCL-II, 50
Character overstrike
PCL-II, 53
Character Set
ASCII, 221
Character sets
Epson FX-1050 international overlays, 167
Proprinter III XL control codes, 118
P-Series international, 88
P-Series international overlays, 91
Character style selection
PCL-II, 53 clearing horizontal margins, PCL-II, 56
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 24, 25
Code selection
Bar Code
Table, 34
Configuration report, printing
PCL-II, 71
Configuring
PCL-II, 29
301
Control code description format
Epson FX-1050, 160
Proprinter III XL, 116
P-Series emulation, 80
Control Code Header
P-Series, 81
Control codes
Table, 30
Control codes index
Epson FX-1050, 162
Proprinter emulation, 120
P-Series emulation, 83
Cursor control
PCL-II, 54
D dagger symbol non-standard Epson code, 158
DC2, ESC DC2 (Condensed Print Cancel)
Proprinter control code, 130
DC4, ESC DC4 (Double Wide Print Cancel)
Proprinter control code, 132
Default values
Epson FX-1050 emulation, 156
PCL-II, 28
Proprinter III XL emulation, 114
P-Series emulation, 78
Density selection for bit images, 203
DIAGNOSTICS PASSED, 24
Diskette storage of emulation configuration, 29
Display functions mode
PCL-II, 55
E
EAN13
Bar Code, width, 40
EAN8
Bar Code, width, 40 emulation switching, 28
Epson FX vertical tabs, 216
Epson FX-1050 emulation, 155 character sets, 159
302 configuring with control codes, 160 control code description format, 160 control codes, 162
Backspace (BS), 165
Bell (BEL), 165
Cancel Line (CAN), 165
Carriage Return (CR), 166
Character Pitch 10 CPI (ESC P), 166
Character Pitch 12 CPI (ESC M), 166
Character Pitch 15 CPI (ESC g), 166
Character Set Select
International Languages (ESC R), 167
Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 (ESC =),
168
Condensed Print Reset (DC2), 169
Condensed Print (SI, ESC SI), 168
Cut-Sheet/Paper Feed Control (ESC EM), 169
Define a Download Character (ESC &), 169
Delete Character (DEL), 169
Double High Print. Set/Reset (ESC w), 170
Double Strike (ESC G), 170
Double Strike, Cancel (ESC H), 171
Double Wide Print (ESC W), 171
Double Wide Print (1 Line), Cancel (DC4), 172
Double Wide Print, 1 Line (SO), 172
Emphasized Print (ESC E), 173
Emphasized Print, Cancel (ESC F), 173
Enable Printing Hex 00-1F and 80-9F (ESC I),
173
Form Feed (FF), 175
Graphics, double density double speed (ESC
Y), 177
Graphics, double density (ESC L), 176
Graphics, quadruple density (ESC Z), 178
Graphics, standard density (ESC K), 175
Half Speed Mode, On/Off (ESC s), 178
Horizontal Tab Execute (HT), 179
Horizontal Tab Set/Release (ESC D), 179
Initialize Printer (ESC @), 180
Italic Printing Cancel (ESC 5), 180
Italic Printing (ESC 4), 180
Line Feed n/216 Inch (ESC J), 181
Line Feed (LF), 181
Line Spacing n/216 Inch (ESC 3), 183
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (ESC A), 184
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi) (ESC 2), 182
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi) (ESC 0), 182
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (ESC 1), 183
Make 80-9F Hex Printable (ESC 6), 184
Master Print Select (ESC !), 186
Paper Out Detection Disable (ESC 8), 187
Paper Out Detection Enable (ESC 9), 186
Pass Bit 7 from Host (ESC #), 187
Printer Deselect (DC3), 187
Printer Select (DC1), 187
Proportional Spacing, Select/Deselect (ESC p),
191
Reassign Graphics Mode (ESC ?), 188
Remove Downloaded Characters, 188
Select Graphics Mode (ESC *), 189
Select Italic Character Set (ESC t), 190
Select Print Quality (ESC x), 191
Select Serif or Sans Serif Font (ESC k), 192
Select User-Defined Font (ESC %), 192
Select Vertical Tab Channel (ESC /), 192
Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode (ESC ^), 190
Set Absolute Print Position in 1/60 Inch (ESC
$), 193
Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 (ESC >),
193
Set Forms Length by Lines (ESC C), 194
Set Forms Length in Inches (ESC C 0), 193
Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1/120 Inch (ESC
SP), 195
Set Margin, Left (ESC l), 195
Set Margin, Right (ESC Q), 195
Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1/120
Inch (ESC ), 196
Set Vertical Tabs in Channels (ESC b), 196
Skip Over Perforation (ESC N), 197
Skip Over Perforation, Cancel (ESC O), 197
Superscript and Subscript Printing (ESC S),
198
Superscript and Subscript Printing, Cancel
(ESC T), 198
Underline (ESC -), 199
Unidirectional Printing, Set/Reset (ESC U), 199
Unidirectional Printing, 1 Line (ESC, 199
Vertical Tab, Execute (VT), 200
Vertical Tab, Set/Clear (ESC B), 200
ESC (Escape) sequences, 160 exceptions, 158 factory settings, 156
Make 80-9F Hex Control Codes (ESC 7) control codes, 184
Set and Reset codes, 161
Epson FX-1050 Features, 20
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 24
ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX, 24
ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 24
ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX, 24
ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED, 24
ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED, 24
ERROR NVRAM FAILURE, 24
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM, 24
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH, 24
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 24
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 25
ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED, 25
ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 25
ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 24, 25
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 25
ESC
(Character Pitch 12 cpi)
Proprinter control code, 129
ESC - (Underline)
Proprinter control code, 154
ESC A (Line Spacing n/72 Inch, Storage)
Proprinter control code, 142
ESC B (Tab Set/Clear, Vertical)
Proprinter control code, 153
ESC C (Forms Length Set in Lines)
Proprinter control code, 135
ESC C 0 (Forms Length Set in Inches)
Proprinter control code, 134
ESC D (Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal)
303
Proprinter control code, 151
ESC E (Emphasized Print)
Proprinter control code, 133
ESC F (Emphasized Print Cancel)
Proprinter control code, 133
ESC G (Bold Printing)
Proprinter control code, 127
ESC H (Bold Printing Cancel)
Proprinter control code, 127
ESC I (Print Mode)
Proprinter control code, 146
ESC J (Line Feed n/216 Inch, One Line Only)
Proprinter control code, 139
ESC K control code single density bit image graphics, 203
ESC K (Bit Image Mode, Single Density)
Proprinter control code, 123
ESC L control code double density bit image graphics, 204
ESC L (Bit Image Mode, Double Density, Half
Speed)
Proprinter control code, 124
ESC N (Margin, Bottom)
Proprinter control code, 144
ESC O (Margin Cancel, Bottom)
Proprinter control code, 144
ESC P (Proportional Spacing)
Proprinter control code, 147
ESC Q (Deselect Printer)
Proprinter control code, 131
ESC R (Tabs, Clear All)
Proprinter control code, 153
ESC S (Superscript/Subscript Printing)
Proprinter control code, 150
ESC T (Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel)
Proprinter control code, 150
ESC U (Unidirectional Printing)
Proprinter control code, 154
ESC W (Double Wide Print)
Proprinter control code, 131
ESC x (Print Quality)
Proprinter control code, 147
ESC Y control code double density bit image graphics, 204
ESC Y (Bit Image Mode, Double Density, Normal
Speed)
Proprinter control code, 125
ESC Z control code quadruple density bit image graphics, 204
ESC Z (Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density)
Proprinter control code, 126
ESC (Print All Characters)
Proprinter control code, 145
ESC 0 (Line Spacing 1/8 Inch, 8 lpi)
Proprinter control code, 140
ESC 1 (Line Spacing 7/72 Inch, 10.3 lpi)
Proprinter control code, 140
ESC 2 (Line Spacing n/72 Inch, Executes)
Proprinter control code, 141
ESC 3 (Line Spacing n/216 inch)
Proprinter control code, 143
ESC 4 (Set Top-of-Form)
Proprinter control code, 149
ESC 5 (Carriage Return Set)
Proprinter control code, 129
ESC 6 (Character Set Select
Set 2(B))
Proprinter control code, 129
ESC 7 (Character Set Select
Set 1(A))
Proprinter control code, 129
ESC ^ (Print Next Character)
Proprinter control code, 146
ESC _ (Overscoring)
Proprinter control code, 145
Escape sequences
PCL-II, 31
Escape (ESC) control codes overview
IBM Proprinter III XL, 116
Escape (ESC) sequences
Epson FX-1050, 160
EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit), 218
EVFU (Electronic Vertical Formatting Unit) channel assignment, 218
304
clearing the memory, 220 end load code, 218
P-Series, 218 start load code, 218 using the EVFU, 219
F
Factory settings
Epson FX-1050 emulation, 156
PCL-II, 28
Proprinter III XL emulation, 114
P-Series emulation, 78
Feature Access
Transparent Mode, 74
FF (Form Feed)
Proprinter control code, 134
Flash memory, loading, 20
Flash messages
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 24, 25
DIAGNOSTICS PASSED, 24
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 24
ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX, 24
ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 24
ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX, 24
ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED, 24
ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED, 24
ERROR NVRAM FAILURE, 24
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM, 24
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH,
24
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 24
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 25
ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED, 25
ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 25
ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 24, 25
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 25
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 25
RESETTING . . . / PLEASE WAIT, 25
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 25
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 25
SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR,
25
TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN, 25
Font selection
11.3 cpi, US Postnet, 44
G
General information
PCL-II, 30
Graphics, 75
Graphics and Text, Combining, 212
Graphics control codes overview
IBM Proprinter III XL, 117
Graphics Mode
8-Pin, 189
Graphics printing
Proprinter and Epson bit image graphics, 201
Graphics printing overview, 201
Graphics Resolution
Table, 69
H
Horizontal margin selection
PCL-II, 55
HP 1000 information
PCL-II, 76
HP 3000 information
PCL-II, 74
HT (Tab, Horizontal)
Proprinter control code, 151
I
IBM Proprinter III XL overview See Proprinter III XL emulation, 113
Ignored and reserved control codes
Proprinter III XL emulation, 118
Image printing overview, 201
Industrial 2 of 5
Bar Code, width, 39
Interleaved 2 of 5
Bar Code, width, 39
International character sets
Epson FX-1050, 167
Italic, character selection
PCL-II, 53
305
K
ESC, 136
Proprinter control codes
Initialize Parameters (ESC, 136
L
Labels, multiple
Printing, 37
Levels, compatible, PCL-II, 29
LF (Line Feed)
Proprinter control code, 138
Line spacing
PCL-II, 56
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 25
M
Manuals, related, 18
Margins, Horizontal (ESC X)
Proprinter control code, 144
Memory, Flash loading software, 20
Moving paper, VFC
PCL-II, 60
O
Odd dot plot pattern plan, 210
Odd Dot Plot Sample, 210
P
Paper slewing, 215
Parameter, escape sequence
PCL-II, 31
PCL-II, 27 default settings, 28 levels of compatibility, 29
Perforation skip mode, 75
PCL-II, 57
PI Line not used by Proprinter emulation, 116
Plot
Odd Dot Sample, 210
Truncated Character Line, 211
Plot density
306
P-Series emulation, 206
Plot mode data line format, 208 double density plot, 209 high density plot sample, 207 normal density plot, 209 normal density plot sample, 206 odd dot pattern plan, 210 plot data byte format, 207
Plot mode graphics
P-Series emulation, 206
Prefix, escape sequence
PCL-II, 31
Primary symbol set
PCL-II, 51
Print mode selection
PCL-II, 58
Print pitch selection
PCL-II, 58
Printing Bar Codes
Bar Codes, printing, 36
Printing hex values
Printer behavior
7-bit characters
8-bit characters, 58
Programmable reset
PCL-II, 60
Programmable VFC
PCL-II, 60
Proprinter control codes
Backspace (BS), 122
Bell (BEL), 122
Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Half Speed),
ESC L, 124
Bit Image Mode, Double Density, Normal
Speed (ESC Y), 125
Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density (ESC Z),
126
Bit Image Mode, Single Density (ESC K), 123
Bold Printing Cancel (ESC H), 127
Bold Printing (ESC G), 127
Cancel (CAN), 128
Carriage Return Set (ESC 5), 129
Carriage Return (CR), 128
Character Pitch 12 cpi (ESC
), 129
Character Set Select
Set 1(A) (ESC 7), 129
Set 2(B) (ESC 6), 129
Condensed Print Cancel (DC2, ESC DC2), 130
Condensed Print (SI, ESC SI), 130
Deselect Printer (ESC Q), 131
Double Wide Print (ESC W), 131
Double Wide Print (One Line Only) Cancel
(DC4, ESC DC4), 132
Double Wide Print, One Line Only (SO), 132
Emphasized Print Cancel (ESC F), 133
Emphasized Print (ESC E), 133
Form Feed (FF), 134
Forms Length Set in Inches (ESC C 0), 134
Forms Length Set in Lines (ESC C), 135 grouped by function, 120
Line Feed n/216 Inch, One Line Only (ESC J),
139
Line Feed (LF), 138
Line Spacing n/216 Inch (ESC 3), 143
Line Spacing n/72 Inch, Executes (ESC 2), 141
Line Spacing n/72 Inch, Storage (ESC A), 142
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch, 8 lpi (ESC 0), 140
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch, 10.3 lpi (ESC 1), 140
Margin Cancel, Bottom (ESC O), 144
Margins, Horizontal (ESC X), 144
Margin, Bottom (ESC N), 144
Overscoring (ESC_), 145
Print All Characters (ESC ), 145
Print Mode (ESC I), 146
Print Next Character (ESC ^), 146
Print Quality (ESC x), 147
Proportional Spacing (ESC P), 147
Set Top-of-Form (ESC 4), 149
Superscript/Subscript Printing Cancel (ESC T),
150
Superscript/Subscript Printing (ESC S), 150
Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal (ESC D), 151
Tab Set/Clear, Vertical (ESC B), 153
Tabs, Clear All (ESC R), 153
Tab, Horizontal (HT), 151
Tab, Vertical (VT), 152
Underline (ESC -), 154
Proprinter III XL emulation character set control codes, 118 configuring via control codes and menus, 113 control code description format, 116
ESC (Escape) control codes overview, 116 factory settings, 114, 156 graphics control codes overview, 117 ignored and reserved control codes, 118 overview, 113 vertical tabs, 216
Proprinter III XL Features, 20
P-Series plot data byte format, 207 plot mode, 210
P-Series emulation, 77 configuring via control codes and menus, 27,
77 control code description format, 80 control codes, 83
Backspace (BS), 85
Bell (BEL), 85
Bold Print Reset (SFCC H), 86
Bold Print (SFCC G), 86
Carriage Return (CR), 87
Character Set Select
ECMA Latin 1 Extended (SFCC OSET), 90
International Languages (SFCC PSET, SFCC
R), 91
Character Set Select (SFCC 1), 88
Characters 80-9F, Control Codes (SFCC 7), 92
Characters 80-9F, Printable Symbols (SFCC
6), 92
Elongated (Double High) Print, Set/Reset
(SFCC w), 94
Elongated (Double High) Print, 1 Line Only
(SFCC h, BS), 93
Emphasized Print Reset (SFCC F), 95
307
Emphasized Print (SFCC E), 94
Emulation Reset (SFCC @), 95
Expanded Print, Double Wide (SFCC W), 96
Expanded Print, Double Wide 1 LIne Only
(SFCC k), 96
Extended Character Set Cancel (SI, SFCC SI),
97
Extended Character Set (S0, SFCC SO), 97
Form Feed (FF), 98
Forms Length Set in Inches (SFCC INCHES),
99
Forms Length Set in Lines (SFCC LINES), 99
Line Feed (LF), 100
Line Spacing n/216 Inch (SFCC 3), 104
Line Spacing n/72 Inch (SFCC A), 103
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (SFCC A), 100
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch, 8 lpi (SFCC LPI), 101
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (SFCC 1), 102
Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 lpi, 1 line only (ACK),
101
Overscoring (SFCC_), 104
Plot, Even Dot, P-Series High Density Graphics
(EOT), 105
Plot, Odd Dot, P-Series Normal Density
Graphics (ENQ), 105
Print Mode/Pitch Selection (SFCC PMODE),
106
Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset (SFCC T),
110
Superscript/Subscript Printing (SFCC S), 110
Underline (SFCC), 111
Vertical Tab (VT), 111
VFU Commands, 111 extended and multinational character sets, 88 factory settings, 28, 78 high density plot sample, 207 normal density plot sample, 206 plot density, 206 plot mode graphics, 206
P-Series EVFU, 218, 219 channel assignment, 218 clearing the memory, 220 end load code, 218 start load code, 218
P-Series Features, 19
P-Series Plot Mode
How to Exit, 211
P-Series plot mode data byte format sample, 208
PTX Linefeed, 59
R
Raster graphics
PCL-II, 69 reseting, PCL-II, 60
RESETTING . . . / PLEASE WAIT, 25
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 25
Royal Mail barcode, 40
S
Save Custom Sets menu option, 29
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 25 selecting fonts, attributes, 50
Self-test
PCL-II, 71
SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR, 25
Serial Interface, 74
Set and Reset Codes
Epson FX-1050 emulation, 161
SFCC
P-Series, 81
SFCC 1 (Character Set Select)
P-Series control code, 88
SI, ESC SI (Condensed Print)
Proprinter control code, 130
SO (Double Wide Print, One Line Only)
Proprinter control code, 132
Software loading into Flash memory, 20
Standard
PCL-II, 71
Storage of emulation configuration on diskette, 29
Stroke Weight
PCL-II, 71
Switching character font
308
PCL-II, 71 switching emulations, 28
Symbol set selection
PCL-II, 51
Table, 51
T
TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN, 25
Tabs, vertical
Epson FX, 216
Proprinter III XL emulation, 216
Terminator, escape sequence
PCL-II, 31
Text length selection
PCL-II, 56, 72
Throughput increased, VFC
PCL-II, 73
Transparent print data
PCL-II, 72
Truncated Character Line, 211
U
UCC/EAN-128
Bar Code, 40
Underlining
PCL-II, 72
Unidirectional Printing (ESC U)
Proprinter control code, 154
UPCA
Bar Code, width, 39
UPCE
Bar Code, width, 39
Upgrading software, 20
Upright, character selection
PCL-II, 53
US Postnet printing check digits, 43
US Postnet bar code
4.0 cpi, 46
V
Vertical format unit (VFU), 215
Vertical format units (VFUs) general programming information, 215
Vertical formatting
P-Series EVFU, 218
Vertical forms control
PCL-II, 73
Vertical page format planning, 215
Vertical tabbing example, 217
Vertical tabs
Epson FX, 216
Proprinter III XL emulation, 216
VFC Channel Definitions
Table, 73
VFU characteristics, 216
VT (Tab, Vertical)
Proprinter control code, 152
Z
11.3 CPI US Postnet Bar Code, 44
309
310
Copyright© 2000
Hewlett-Packard Company
Manual Part Number
171249-001PX
171249-001A
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 1 Front of Document
- 7 Table of Contents
- 17 Introduction
- 17 About This Guide
- 17 Warnings and Special Information
- 18 Related Product Information
- 19 Software Features
- 19 PCL-II
- 20 Proprinter III XL
- 20 Epson FX-1050
- 27 HP PCL-II
- 27 Introduction
- 28 HP PCL-II Emulation Default Settings
- 28 Switching Between the Emulations
- 29 Configuring the PCL-II Emulation with Control Codes
- 29 Printer Feature Set Compatibility
- 30 General Information
- 31 Escape Sequences
- 34 Bar Codes
- 38 Bar Code Width Information
- 47 Character Density Selection
- 50 Character Font Selection
- 53 Character Overstrike
- 53 Character Style Selection
- 54 Cursor Control
- 55 Display Functions Mode
- 55 Horizontal Margin Selection
- 56 Logical Page Length Selection
- 57 Perforation Skip Mode
- 58 Print Mode Selection
- 58 Print Pitch Selection
- 58 Printing in the Hex 80 through Hex FF Region
- 59 PTX Linefeed
- 60 Programmable Reset
- 60 Programmable VFC
- 69 Raster Graphics
- 71 Self-test
- 71 Standard (Computed) VFC
- 71 Stroke Weight (Bold)
- 71 Switching Character Fonts
- 72 Text Length (Vertical Margin) Selection
- 72 Transparent Print Data
- 72 Underline Mode
- 73 Vertical Forms Control (VFC)
- 74 HP 3000 Information
- 74 Feature Access and Transparent Modes
- 74 VFC Download with a Serial Interface
- 75 Carriage-Control Directives
- 75 Printing in the Perforation Skip Region
- 76 HP 1000 Information
- 76 Downloading VFC
- 76 Perforation Skip Mode
- 77 P-Series Printer Emulation
- 77 Overview
- 78 P-Series Default Values and States
- 80 Configuring the P-Series Emulation with Control Codes
- 113 Overview
- 80 Format for Control Code Descriptions
- 80 Switching Between the Emulations
- 81 Special Function Control Code (SFCC) Header
- 81 SFCC Command Line
- 82 Attribute Set and Reset Codes
- 82 NUL Code
- 82 Print Modes Supported for Character Sets
- 83 The Control Codes
- 85 Backspace
- 86 Bold Print
- 86 Bold Print Reset
- 87 Carriage Return
- 88 Character Set Select
- 90 Character Set Select: ECMA Latin 1 Extended
- 91 Character Set Select: International Languages
- 92 Characters 80-9F (Control Codes)
- 92 Characters 80-9F (Printable Symbols)
- 93 Elongated (Double High) Print, One Line Only
- 94 Elongated (Double High) Print, Set/Reset
- 94 Emphasized Print
- 95 Emphasized Print Reset
- 95 Emulation Reset
- 96 Expanded Print (Double Wide), One Line Only
- 96 Expanded Print (Double Wide), Set/Reset
- 97 Extended Character Set
- 97 Extended Character Set Cancel (Primary Set Select)
- 98 Form Feed
- 99 Forms Length Set (Inches)
- 99 Forms Length Set (Lines)
- 100 Line Feed
- 100 Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)
- 101 Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)
- 101 Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 lpi (1 Line Only)
- 102 Line Spacing 7/72 Inch
- 103 Line Spacing n/72 Inch
- 104 Line Spacing n/216 Inch
- 104 Overscoring
- 105 Plot, Even Dot (P-Series High Density Graphics)
- 105 Plot, Odd Dot (P-Series Normal Density Graphics)
- 106 Print Mode/Pitch Selection
- 110 Superscript/Subscript Printing
- 110 Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset
- 111 Underline
- 111 VFU Commands
- 111 Vertical Tab
- 113 IBM Proprinter III XL
- 113 Overview
- 114 Proprinter III XL Emulation Default Settings
- 116 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes
- 116 Format for Control Code Descriptions
- 116 Escape Control Codes Overview
- 117 Graphics Control Codes Overview
- 119 Switching Between the Emulations
- 120 The Control Codes
- 122 Backspace
- 122 Bell
- 123 Bit Image Mode, Single Density (Normal Speed)
- 124 Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Half Speed)
- 125 Bit Image Mode, Double Density (Normal Speed)
- 126 Bit Image Mode, Quadruple Density (Half Speed)
- 127 Bold Printing
- 127 Bold Printing, Cancel
- 128 Cancel
- 128 Carriage Return
- 129 Carriage Return Set
- 129 Character Set Select: Set 1 (A)
- 129 Character Set Select: Set 2 (B)
- 130 Condensed Print
- 130 Condensed Print, Cancel
- 131 Deselect Printer
- 131 Double Wide Print
- 132 Double Wide Print (One Line Only)
- 132 Double Wide Print (One Line Only) Cancel
- 133 Emphasized Print
- 133 Emphasized Print, Cancel
- 134 Form Feed
- 134 Forms Length Set in Inches
- 135 Forms Length Set in Lines
- 136 Initialize Parameters
- 138 Line Feed
- 139 Line Feed n/216 Inch (One Line Only)
- 140 Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)
- 140 Line Spacing 7/72 Inch (10.3 lpi)
- 141 Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Executes)
- 142 Line Spacing n/72 Inch (Storage)
- 143 Line Spacing n/216 Inch
- 144 Margin, Bottom
- 144 Margin Cancel, Bottom
- 144 Margins, Horizontal
- 145 Overscoring
- 145 Print All Characters
- 146 Print Next Character
- 146 Print Mode
- 147 Print Quality
- 147 Proportional Spacing
- 148 Select Attributes
- 149 Set Top-of-Form
- 150 Superscript/Subscript Printing
- 150 Superscript/Subscript Printing, Cancel
- 151 Tab, Horizontal
- 151 Tab Set/Clear, Horizontal
- 152 Tab, Vertical
- 153 Tab Set/Clear, Vertical
- 153 Tabs, Clear All (Return to default)
- 154 Underline
- 154 Unidirectional Printing
- 155 Epson FX-1050 Emulation
- 155 Overview
- 156 Epson FX-1050 Default Values and States
- 158 Epson Emulation Exceptions and Differences
- 159 Epson Character Sets
- 160 Configuring the Epson FX-1050 Emulation with Control
- 160 Format for Control Code Descriptions
- 160 Escape Sequences
- 161 Attribute Set and Reset Codes
- 161 NUL Code
- 161 Switching Between the Emulations
- 162 The Control Codes
- 165 Backspace
- 165 Bell
- 165 Cancel Line
- 166 Carriage Return
- 166 Character Pitch 10 CPI
- 166 Character Pitch 12 CPI
- 166 Character Pitch 15 CPI
- 167 Character Set Select: International Languages
- 168 Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0
- 168 Condensed Print
- 169 Condensed Print Reset
- 169 Define a Download Character
- 169 Delete Character
- 170 Double High Print, Set/Reset
- 170 Double Strike
- 171 Double Strike, Cancel
- 172 Double Wide Print (One Line)
- 172 Double Wide Print (One Line), Cancel
- 173 Emphasized Print
- 173 Emphasized Print, Cancel
- 173 Enable Printing Hex Codes 00-1F and 80-9F
- 175 Form Feed
- 175 Graphics, Standard Density
- 176 Graphics, Double Density
- 177 Graphics, Double Density Double Speed
- 178 Graphics, Quadruple Density
- 178 Half Speed Mode, On/Off
- 179 Horizontal Tab Execute
- 180 Initialize Printer
- 180 Italic Printing
- 180 Italic Printing, Cancel
- 181 Line Feed
- 181 Line Feed n/216 Inch
- 182 Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)
- 182 Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)
- 183 Line Spacing 7/72 Inch
- 183 Line Spacing n/216 Inch
- 184 Line Spacing n/72 Inch
- 184 Make Hex 80-9F Control Codes
- 184 Make Hex 80-9F Printable
- 186 Master Print Select
- 186 Paper Out Detection, Enable
- 187 Paper Out Detection, Disable
- 187 Pass Bit 7 from Host
- 187 Printer Select
- 187 Printer Deselect
- 188 Reassign Graphics Mode
- 188 Remove Downloaded Characters
- 189 Select Graphics Mode
- 190 Select Italic Character Set
- 190 Select 9-Pin Graphics Mode
- 191 Select Print Quality
- 191 Select/Deselect Proportional Spacing
- 192 Select Serif or Sans Serif Font
- 192 Select User-Defined Font
- 192 Select Vertical Tab Channel
- 193 Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1/60 Inch
- 193 Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1
- 193 Set Form Length in Inches
- 194 Set Form Length in Lines
- 195 Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1/120 Inch
- 195 Set Margin, Left
- 195 Set Margin, Right
- 196 Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1/120 Inch
- 196 Set Vertical Tabs in Channels
- 197 Skip Over Perforation
- 197 Skip Over Perforation, Cancel
- 198 Superscript and Subscript Printing
- 198 Superscript and Subscript Printing, Cancel
- 199 Underline
- 199 Unidirectional Printing, 1 Line
- 199 Unidirectional Printing, Set/Reset
- 200 Vertical Tab, Execute
- 200 Vertical Tab, Set/Clear
- 201 Graphics
- 201 Overview
- 201 Bit Image Graphics
- 203 Designing a Bit Image Pattern
- 204 Bit Image Programming Format
- 205 Bit Image Sample Program
- 206 Plot Mode
- 206 Plot Density
- 207 Plot Data Byte Format
- 208 Plot Data Line Format
- 210 Plotting the Data
- 211 Exiting from P-Series Plot Mode
- 212 Combining Graphics and Text
- 215 Vertical Page Formatting
- 215 Overview
- 215 Planning a Vertical Page Format
- 216 VFU Characteristics
- 216 Proprinter and Epson Vertical Tab Table
- 216 Executing Vertical Tabs
- 217 Vertical Tab Positions
- 218 P-Series EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit)
- 218 Start Load Code - Hex 1E
- 218 Channel Assignment
- 218 End Load - Hex 1F
- 219 Using the EVFU
- 220 Clearing the EVFU Memory
- 221 Standard ASCII Character Set
- 223 P-Series Emulation Character Sets
- 223 Introduction
- 224 IBM PC, Primary Subset: ASCII (USA)
- 240 Multinational, ASCII (USA)
- 242 ECMA Latin 1, Primary Subset: ASCII (USA)
- 260 DEC Multinational, ASCII (USA)
- 273 OCR A
- 274 OCR B
- 275 Proprinter Emulation Character Sets
- 275 Introduction
- 276 0437 PC Character Set
- 277 0850 PC Multilingual
- 278 OCR A
- 279 OCR B
- 281 Epson Emulation Character Sets
- 281 Introduction
- 282 0437 PC Character Set
- 283 0850 PC Multilingual
- 284 Epson Set, ASCII (USA)
- 285 Epson Set, French
- 286 Epson Set, German
- 287 Epson Set, English (UK)
- 288 Epson Set, Danish I
- 289 Epson Set, Swedish
- 290 Epson Set, Italian
- 291 Epson Set, Spanish I
- 292 Epson Set, Japanese
- 293 Epson Set, Norwegian
- 294 Epson Set, Danish II
- 295 Epson Set, Spanish II
- 296 Epson Set, Latin American I
- 297 Epson Set, French Canadian
- 298 Epson Set, Latin American II
- 299 OCR A
- 300 OCR B
- 301 Index